Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 588

Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its

contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TERMS OF USE AND LEGAL NOTICE
Alcatel-Lucent provides this training course to you subject to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. Your use of this training
course and/or this site constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to these Terms of Use and Legal Notice. These
Terms of Use and Legal Notice, as well as the contents of this training course, may be updated or amended by Alcatel-
Lucent from time to time without prior notice to you. Your use of the Alcatel-Lucent training materials after such update
or amendment constitutes your acceptance of and agreement to said updated or amended Terms of Use and Legal Notice.

SAFETY WARNING
Alcatel-Lucent training materials can be for products or refer to products that have both lethal and dangerous voltages
present. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The user is strongly advised not
to wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Equipment referred to or used during this course may be
electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

PERMISSION TO USE CONTENT


The information, communications, scripts, photos, text, video, graphics, music, sounds, images and other materials
provided in this training course (collectively the "Content"), is intended for the lawful use of employees of Alcatel-Lucent
and other authorized participants in this Alcatel-Lucent training course. You are hereby granted a non-exclusive, non-
transferable permission to access and use the Content solely for your personal training and non-commercial use. This
permission may be terminated by Alcatel-Lucent at any time for any reason or no reason, with or without notice. You must
immediately cease use of the Content upon such termination.

COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS


The unauthorized copying, displaying or other use of any Content from this training course is a violation of the law and
Alcatel-Lucent’s corporate policies. The Content is protected in France, the U.S. and other countries by a variety of laws,
including but not limited to, copyright laws and treaty provisions, trademark laws, patent laws and other proprietary rights
laws (collectively, "IP Rights"). In addition to Alcatel-Lucent’s IP Rights in the Content, in part and in whole, Alcatel-Lucent,
and any of the third parties who have licensed and/or contributed to the Content, owns a copyright in the formatting and
presentation of the Content.
Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you any permission to use the Content other than the permission expressly stated in these
Terms of Use and Legal Notice. All other use of Content from this training course, including, but not limited to,
modification, publication, transmission, participation in the transfer or sale of, copying, reproduction, republishing,
creation of derivative works from, distribution, performance, display, incorporation into another training course or
presentation, or in any other way exploiting any of the Content, in whole or in part, for uses other than those expressly
permitted herein is strictly prohibited and shall not be made without Alcatel-Lucent’s prior written consent. All characters
appearing in this training course are fictitious. Any resemblance to real persons, living or dead, is purely coincidental.
There may be a number of proprietary logos, marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations found in the
Content. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logos are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Alcatel-Lucent does not grant you a license to use any of the
foregoing logos, marks, trademarks, slogans and product designations in any fashion. Granting of the right to access and
use the Content for training purposes does not confer upon you any license under any of Alcatel-Lucent’s or any third
party's IP Rights.

DISCLAIMER
ALCATEL-LUCENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES REGARDING THE TRAINING COURSES OR THE CONTENT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ALCATEL-LUCENT WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS, CLAIM, DAMAGE, OR ANY
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND (INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION LOSS PROFITS OR LOSS SAVINGS), WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, THAT
ARISES OUT OF OR IS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH (A) ANY USE OR MISUSE OF THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES
BY YOU, OR (B) ANY FAILURE OR DELAY BY ALCATEL-LUCENT, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE CONTENT OR THE TRAINING COURSES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE USE OF OR INABILITY
TO USE ANY COMPONENT OF THE CONTENT OR TRAINING BY YOU). SOME JURISDICTIONS LIMIT OR PROHIBIT SUCH
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES AND SO THE FOREGOING EXCLUSION OF WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

GOVERNING LAW
These Terms of Use and Legal Notice are governed by the laws of France. The operation and use of the training course is
governed by the laws of the country that governs your employment contract, if applicable. If any provision of these Terms
of Use and Legal Notice, or the application thereto to a person or circumstance, is held invalid or unenforceable by law,
statute or a court of competent jurisdiction, for any reason, then such provision shall be modified and/or superseded by a
provision that reflects the intent of the original provision as closely as possible. All other provisions of these Terms of Use
and Legal Notice shall remain in full force and effect. You may not assign these Terms of Use or any permission granted
hereunder without Alcatel-Lucent’s prior written consent. Nothing herein shall be deemed an employment agreement or
an offer of employment or an alteration in any way of a user’s terms of employment with or within Alcatel-Lucent.
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


Welcome to UTRAN
LR13.W R99 Algorithms Description

1. UTRAN R99 Algorithms Description


1. UTRAN Parameters and Objects
2. UTRAN Configuration
3. Services
4. Measurements
5. Call Admission
6. Power Management
7. Call Management
8. Mobility in Reselection
9. Mobility in SHO
10. Inter-carrier Mobility in HHO
11. Inter-carrier Mobility at RRC connection
12. Glossary

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


UTRAN
LR13.W R99 Algorithms Description

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

describe the organization of UTRAN parameters


evaluate the impact of parameter modifications
describe the UTRAN configuration management process and tools
describe main measurements purpose and use
describe Compressed Mode principles, implementation, configuration, and impacts on other UTRAN
features
describe the mobility in Idle Mode and the associated parameters: cell selection, cell reselection
describe the call establishment and the associated parameters: RAB matching, IRM RAB to RB
mapping, CAC, CELL_FACH admission
describe the packet data management principles: Always On, Rb rate adaptation, iRM scheduling,
iRM preemption and associated parameters
describe power management and control with the associated parameters
describe handover types and purpose: SHO, alarm handovers, iMCTA algorithm

Your feedback is appreciated!


Please feel free to Email your comments to:

training.feedback@alcatel-lucent.com

Please include the following training reference in your email:


TMO18255_V1.0-SG Edition 1

Thank you!

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 4
Page

1 UTRAN configuration overview 7


1.1 UTRAN configuration process & tools 8
1.2 Customer Input Questionnaire (CIQ) 9
1.3 UTRAN CM solution overview 10
1.4 UTRAN CM XML files exchange 11
2 Organization of UTRAN parameters 12
2.1 UTRAN objects mapping 13
2.2 UTRAN parameter domain 14
2.3 RAN parameter types 15
2.4 RAN attribute activation classes 17
2.5 RAN object activation classes 18
2.6 RRM subtree 19
2.7 Configuration classes instantiation 20

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 7
This process describes how to configure UTRAN Network Elements (NEs) during a deployment phase. The main
steps are the following:
Planning Activities:
Check UTRAN CIQs consistency
Provide neighboring XML files for cell planning
Provide the last WPS templates and ATM Profile
Provisioning Activities:
Generate full configuration with WPS
Export XML files from WPS
Operation Administration & Maintenance Activities:
Load configuration data into their respective NEs
Build the database (MIB) of the RNS and make sure all the local pieces of information are up-to-date.
Perform real-time adjustments to the initial network configuration.
Note:
These steps do not necessarily apply to other contexts such as introduction of new features, addition of new NEs,
network optimization, etc.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 8
The Customer Input Questionnaire is a repository where all parameter values and configuration data required for
the later data fill of the UTRAN subsystem are stored.
As mentioned in the document header: "The CIQ is used by the Wireless Network Engineering team, Regional
Engineering and deployment personnel to better understand the customer requirements”.
Each manager of a Local Engineering team (in relation with the other activity groups) is in charge of filling his own
part of the CIQ along with the operator:
Radio Frequency (RF) staff fills RF parameters. The RF team can also provide XML files coming from any
cell planning tool such as iPlanner.
IP engineering staff fills the IP addresses.
ATM engineering staff fills the ATM parameters.
Etc.
The UTRAN CIQ template highlights for each parameter the domain it belongs to (Design, IP, ATM, etc.).
At WPS level, the UTRAN data fill engineer is in charge of checking the consistency and completeness of the
UTRAN CIQs.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 9
For the UMTS Access Network, Wireless-Network Management System provides two complementary sets of
configuration tools:
An off-line configuration tool to support network engineering.
An on-line configuration tool to support network operations.
These two toolkits fully inter-work and provide a consistent user environment for the engineering and operations
staff.
Off-line configuration is designed to support efficient bulk configuration of the UTRAN by the engineering
staff. Users can import, modify and export data, both from the UMTS access network and from 3rd party
engineering tools (such as iPlanner). Off-line Configuration delivers a seamless network-engineering
environment from initial network design through to actual network configuration.
On-line configuration has been designed to change the configuration of the UTRAN in real-time. Not adapted
to bulk configuration, the On-line configuration mainly concerns specific operations such as extending the
network, adding NEs, etc.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 10
At any time during the network building steps, the data filler can export part of his work towards other platforms.
The following Configuration Management (CM) files can be exported:
Snapshots
Work orders
According to the option selected, the result of the export will be very different:
Exporting the current state of the network as a snapshot means merging the elementary operations
performed by the work orders with the initial snapshot. As WPS says: “the current planning view is the result
of the execution of work orders on the initial snapshot”.
Exporting the work order means gathering all the elementary operations performed upon a snapshot into a
CM file for further use (other WPS platforms, WMS).

D = Delta

S = Snapshot

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 11
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 12
The RAN model is split into two parts:
Hardware Equipment: this part groups all elements (parameters) that define the equipment (BTS) and the
Passport module (Pmod). It is the physical part of that model.
Logical Configuration: this other part groups all elements that define the Node B and RNC logical
configuration. It is called “logical part” because it defines the software for logical radio sectors and logical
RNC nodes.
To create a link between the Hardware Equipment (physical part) and the Logical Configuration (logical part), it is
necessary to link several elements from both parts. For example, to link the logical sectors to the physical
equipment, the user has to attach a BTSCell (physical part) to one FDDCell (logical part). This specific operation
is called “Mapping”.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 13
Two different types of parameters are designed to configure a UMTS Access Network:
Control Node, Node B and RAN parameters
Interface Node, Access Node and Passport parameters
Changing parameter values may impact the behavior of the live network.
For RAN parameters, the impact triggered by a parameter modification is strongly linked with the parameter
classes (see next slide).
For Passport parameters, it is not always easy to predict the impact of a parameter modification. Possible
consequences are:
nothing
reset of an interface
reset of a module
reset of a node

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 14
There are two main kinds of parameters in the Alcatel-Lucent system: static and configuration parameters.

The static parameters have the following characteristics:


They have a fixed value and cannot be modified at the Access OAM.
They are part of the network element load.
A new network element needs to be reloaded and built in order to change their values.
They cannot be modified by the customer.

The configuration parameters have the following characteristic: they are contained in the Access OAM database.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 15
The customer parameters have been reviewed and tagged with the following rules:
System_restricted:
Parameters which should not be modified in live networks. Proposal also to align the settings for these
parameters on WNE templates at upgrade
Customer_setting:
Parameters which have to be set by the customer, either due to design or to activate optional features
Expert_tuning:
Parameters which can be modified by the customer, but with a specific support from Alcatel-Lucent,
because of the complexity or sensitivity of this parameter with respect to QoS.
Customer_tuning:
Parameters which can be modified by the customer, without specific support from Alcatel-Lucent

This table gives an overview of the number of parameters in UA07:

Count of Object User

Domain Class Customer Manufacturer Grand Total


BTS 0 87 44 131
2 2 2
3 310 3 313
BTS Total 399 47 446
RNC 0 177 16 193
2 97 97
3 1918 8 1926
RNC Total 2192 24 2216
Grand Total 2591 71 2662

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 16
Class0: value set at object creation. Parameters require a build to be implemented on the NEs – large impact on
system

Class2: parameters require a lock of the object (or its parent object) in order to change the parameter value -
slight impact on system

Class3: the parameter can be changed online without impact on the service. Three sub-classes are derived from
Class 3:
Class 3-A1: new value is immediately taken into account.
Class 3-A2: new value is taken into account upon event reception (service establishment, SRLR, LCS, etc.).
Class 3-B: new value is taken into account for next calls.

Customer: the parameter is configurable from the OMC and seen by the operator
Manufacturer: the parameter is configurable from the OMC and only seen by Alcatel-Lucent engineering teams

Example:
MO Name MO Attribut Name Class

PowerPartConfClass CallAdmissionRatio 3-A1

HSDPACellClass maximumNumberOfUsers 3-A2

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 17
The object activation class defines the object behavior with respect to the “create online” and “delete online”
operations.

Not Allowed: the object cannot be created/deleted online. A build is required.

Allowed With Parent: the object can be created/deleted online but the operation requires the creation/deletion
of the parent.

Allowed With Lock: the object can be created/deleted online but the operation requires locking the object or
one of its ancestors in the containment tree.

Allowed: the object can be created/deleted online.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 18
Radio Resource Management is an essential piece of the RNC controlling the radio resources allocated to the
users.
The RadioAccessService object is the root of the RRM architecture. It includes a set of parameters that apply to
the whole Radio Network Subsystem.
Some of the parameters of the RRM tree are stored in libraries composed of Configuration Classes and
Configuration Classes Instances.

There are 7 Main Configuration Classes, some of them containing children:


CacConfClass
HoConfClass
MeasurementConfClass
NodeBConfClass
PowerConfClass
PowerPartConfClass
PowerCtrlConfClass

Each of these Configuration Classes can have a maximum of 5 different instances. Each instance then
corresponds to a predefined set of parameters (see example next page).

CID:
9YZ-04088-0020-RKZZA 9353 WMS RAN Model Parameters Reference Guide LR13.1.W Issue 0.06 June 2013

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 19
Configuration Classes are involved in Node B, FDDCell and NeighbouringRNC configuration.

Once all the configuration classes are defined, each FDDCell belonging to the RNC has pointers defined by the
following parameters:
powerConfId
PowerPartId
PowerCtrlConfId
HoConfId
cacConfId
MeasurementConfId

In the example above, we can see that each instance of CacConfClass includes a set of predefined parameters.
Each parameter belonging to the CacConfClass object can take a different value under each instance.
For example, the maxUlInterferenceLevel can take values from -112 dBm to -50 dBm according to the selected
instance.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 20
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.1 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 1 · Page 21
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 4
Page

1 RNC configuration 7
1.1 Identification & capacity 8
2 Node B configuration 9
2.1 FDDCell identifiers 10
2.2 Channel numbers 11
2.3 Scrambling Codes (SC) 12
2.4 Automatic carrier switch off (ACSO) 13
2.4.1 Switch off description 14
2.4.2 Switch on description 15
2.4.3 RAN model 16
2.5 Node B capacity licensing 17
3 Neighboring cell configuration 19
3.1 FDDCell, RemoteFDDCell, GSMCell 20
3.1.1 Corresponding RAN model 21
3.2 UMTSFddNeighbouringCell 22
3.3 GsmNeighbouringCell 23
3.4 UmtsNeighbouringRelation 24
3.4.1 Example 25
3.5 SIB11/DCH neighboring lists 26

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 7
The different RNCs of the network are simply identified by their RncId under the RNC object.

The capacity of the RNC in terms of number of calls, number of supported BTSs and cells depends on two major
factors:
The number of TMUs (hardware configuration)
The software configuration.
The parameter CnodeCapacity is no longer supported from UA06.
From UA06, the service group to which a given Node B is allocated can be specified by the operator
(ServiceGroupId parameter of the NodeB object).
It is also possible to know on which TMU an RNC has set a given service group. Thus with these facilities, it is
now possible to modify the affectation of one Node B from a given service group to another one (and
consequently from a PMC-TMU to another one). This possibility may be interesting in order to better balance the
load between the PMC-TMU if needed. Nevertheless, it has to be noticed that the re-affectation of one Node B
from a Service Group to another one implies a loss of service on this Node B.
The number of service groups of an RNC is specified by the numberOfServiceGroups parameter of the RNC
object.
The ServiceGroupId parameter of the Iub object specifies, which service group interface is assigned to this Iub.
All IubIfs provisioned with the same ServiceGroupId will be processed by the same PMC-TMU processor. The
ServiceGroupId provisioned on this IubIf must match the ServiceGroupId configured on the RNC NodeB
managed object.

Service group id refers to a given TMU board and that NumberOfServiceGroups = total number of TMU boards.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 8
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 9
The standardization of the Iub interface has driven Alcatel-Lucent to define an object model based on a logical
part and a physical part in order to cope with the multi-vendor configurations:
The logical part of the equipment (Node B and RNC) is managed by the OMC-R in WMS.
The physical part of the equipment (BTS) is managed by the OMC-B in WMS.

The mapping between the two parts is ensured by the localCellId parameter, coded into 28 bits, found under the
FDDCell and BTSCell objects. It is recommended to have a unique localCellId in the whole network for OAM
purposes, to prevent problems during neighboring declaration.
In the UTRAN, the different cells (part of the Node Bs) are identified uniquely by their ucid.

This ucid contains the identifier of the RNC - the RncId - coded into 12 bits, defined under the RNC object. It
contains also the cellId, coded into 16 bits, defined under the FDDCell object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 10
The frequency of a carrier is defined:
in uplink by the ulFrequencyNumber parameter.
in downlink by the dlFrequencyNumber parameter.

Both parameters correspond to the UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (UARFCN) where:
UARFCN = 5 * Frequency (MHz).
UTRAN is designed to operate with the following Tx-Rx frequency separation:
ITU Region 1 & 3; duplex shift = 190 MHz
ITU Region 2; duplex shift = 80 MHz

However, it is possible to have a channel separation, which is different from these standard values, due to the
channel raster.
The channel raster is 200 kHz, which means that the center frequency must be an integer multiple of 200 kHz.
The nominal channel spacing is 5 MHz, but this can be adjusted to optimize performance in a particular
deployment scenario.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 11
A UE is surrounded by Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs), all of which transmit on the same W-CDMA frequency.
It must be able to discriminate between the different cells of different base stations and listen to only one set of
channel codes. Therefore, two types of codes are used:
DL Channelization Code.
The user data are spread synchronously with different channelization codes. The orthogonality properties of
OVSF enable the UE to recover each of its bits without being disturbed by other user channels.
DL Scrambling Code.
Scrambling is used for cell identification.

Scrambling Code parameters


The Primary Scrambling Code (P-SC) of each cell is set with the primaryScramblingCode parameter of the
FDDCell object. The range of the P-SC must be between 0 and 511. On the Iub interface, the system will convert
this value (defined as i) using the following formula: P-SC = 16 * i.

When Secondary SCq are not in use, the aichScramblingCode and the sccpchDlScramblingCode must be set
to 0. The 0 value will define the AICH Scrambling Code = the Primary SC, and the S-CCPCH Scrambling Code =
the Primary SC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 12
The automatic carrier shutdown in case of low traffic is supported:
on STSR X+Y Node B where a sector is served by two MCPAs or two TRDUs.
on STSR X+Y configurations with 2 RRHs per sector where a sector is served by 2 MCPAs.

The configurations are STSR 1+1, STSR 2+1 and STSR 2+2 allow automatic switch off.

The automatic carrier shutdown in case of power supply alarm is supported on STSR X+Y with AC supply.

The procedure used to unload the cells of a carrier to be shut down is the same as the one used by the Node B
Soft Shutdown feature available from UA06.

The automatic reconfiguration of the remaining carrier for HSDPA support is in restriction.
This means that if R’99 is configured on F1 and HSxPA on F2 on a STSR1+1 configuration, when F2 will be shut
down, the customer will lose the HSxPA coverage.

ACSO Automatic Carrier Switch Off

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 13
Feature benefits:

ACSO in case of low traffic allows saving energy during off-peak hours: when all the cells relating to a
particular Power Amplifier of a Node B are switched off, then the Node B will switch off the Power Amplifier
(the Power Amplifier is in “standby mode” : the radio power module is switched off, while the digital unit
remains alive).

ACSO in case of AC mains failures allows saving battery energy in degraded conditions: when the Node B
PA looses AC mains power, backup battery takes over and the node B informs the RNC that this event
occurred. The RNC starts to switch off all the cells relating to that PA. Once all the cells are switched off, the
Node B will switch off the PA.

ACSO Automatic Carrier Switch Off

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 14
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 15
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 16
This feature provides the technical base for ‘Pay-as-you-grow’ commercial schemes. With a licensing scheme in
place, the operator can order HW with a reduced capacity and subsequently purchase licenses for additional
capacity.
Node B capacity licenses are per WMS (OMC); the operator can distribute capacity between controlled BTSs via
licensing parameters.
The following Node B capacity aspects are managed in UA06 via this feature: CEM R’99 capacity, CEM HSDPA
capacity, CEM HSUPA capacity, xTRM capacity, RRH capacity, PA power, and RRH power.
Additional capacity license is OMC wide and can be distributed between the controlled BTSs (intra-OMC). There
is no exchange of licenses between OMCs.
License file: it is a file describing the total capacity (temporary or permanent) allocated for all BTSs of a given
OMC. This file is protected by a digital signature.
HW Capacities: The customer can purchase HW and capacities independently.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 17
additionalRadioPerSectorCapacityLicensing controls the number of additional radios that can be configured
on each sector.

The existing UA06 parameter (rrhCarrierCapacityLicensing) represents from UA07 the number of tokens to
allow the configuration of the second carriers of RRH and TRDU and supplementary carriers (3rd and 4th) if all
second carriers have been configured.
The new parameter (rrhTrduThirdCarrierCapacityLicensing) defines the number of supplementary 3rd or
supplementary (4th) Rx carriers allowed for the pool of RRHs and TRDUs.

If the 2nd carrier capacity licensing is infinite, the 3rd carrier capacity licensing becomes obsolete and all 2nd
and supplementary carriers will be configured following the pseudo parameter rrhNumberFrequency.

[xCEM][eCEM] The maximal capacity can be further controlled (limited) by the parameter
hsdpaMaxThroughputXcem.
For xCEM and eCEM, the processing resources can be configured accordingly with the license agreement via
edchMaxThroughputXcem and edchMaxThroughputEcem, which indicates the maximum throughput in kbps
that can be used for E-DCH traffic (MAC-e layer).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 18
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 19
Adjacency between cells (also called Neighboring relation between cells) represents a couple of cells (A and B)
relation where Cell Reselection and/or Soft Handover procedures can be performed from one cell A called Source
cell or Serving cell towards another cell B called Target Cell.
An adjacency is therefore a directional relation between two cells and should rather be noted (A->B).
Adjacencies managed by an RNC can be of 3 kinds:
3G->3G adjacencies where the 3G Target cell is controlled by the same RNC as the CRNC of the Serving
cell.
3G->3G adjacencies where the 3G Target cell is controlled by another RNC than the CRNC of the Serving
cell.
In this case, a new RemoteFDDCell object must created in the RNC object tree of the CRNC of the Serving
cell. This RemoteFDDCell object shall represent the Target 3G cell in the CRNC of the Serving cell.
3G->2G adjacencies
In this case, a new GSMCell object must created in the RNC object tree of the CRNC of the Serving cell.
This GSMCell object shall represent the 2G Target cell in the CRNC of the Serving cell.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 20
All RemoteFDDCell objects of an RNC are grouped under the UmtsNeighbouring child object of this RNC.
All GSMCell objects of an RNC are grouped under the GSMNeighbour child object of this RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 21
In this example, two 3G->3G adjacencies are defined:
B->A where both serving cell B and target cell A are controlled by the same RNC/1.
B->C where serving cell B is controlled by RNC/1 and target cell C is controlled by RNC/2.

B->A adjacency:
FDDCell/B and FDDCell/A objects being defined under RNC/1, the B->A adjacency is configured by creating
under FDDCell/B a child object UMTSFddNeighbouringCell instance having its userLabel parameter value set to
A.

B->C adjacency:
FDDCell/B object being defined under RNC/1 and FDDCell/C object under RNC/2, the B->C adjacency is
configured in two steps:
1. by creating under RNC/1 a RemoteFDDCell object instance having its userLabel parameter set to C.
2. by creating under FDDCell/B a child object UMTSFddNeighbouringCell instance having its userLabel
parameter value set to C.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 22
In this example, a 3G->2G adjacency is defined: B->E.

B->E adjacency:
FDDCell/B object being defined under RNC/1, the B->E adjacency is configured in two steps:
1. by creating under RNC/1 a GSMCell object instance having its userLabel parameter set to E.
2. by creating under FDDCell/B a child object GsmNeighbouringCell instance having its userLabel parameter
value set to E.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 23
In the UMTS network, some radio parameters used for Cell Reselection and Soft Handover procedures are
defined at Adjacency level. In order to limit the size of the Parameter Database in the RNC, these parameters
cannot be set per 3G->3G adjacency object (UMTSFddNeighbouringCell) but per Object Class object called
UmtsNeighbouringRelation as one don’t expect to have very different values from one adjacency to another.
Values usually differ according to the network design, morphostructure, and traffic mix in a certain network area.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 24
In this example, two 3G->3G adjacencies are defined:
A->B where both serving cell A and target cell B are outdoor cells.
A->C where serving cell A is an outdoor cell and target cell C is an indoor one.

A->B adjacency:
A->B Cell Reselection parameters shall be set to the Outdoor->Outdoor type of reselection. Therefore, the
configuration shall be done in two steps:
1. by creating under RNC/1 a UmtsNeighbouringRelation object instance having its userLabel parameter
set to Outdoor->Outdoor (for instance).
2. by setting for UMTSFddNeighbouringCell/B child object of FDDCell/A its umtsNeighRelationId parameter
value set to Outdoor->Outdoor.

A->C adjacency:
A->C Cell Reselection parameters shall be set to the Outdoor->Indoor type of reselection. Therefore, the
configuration shall be done in two steps:
1. by creating under RNC/1 a UmtsNeighbouringRelation object instance having its userLabel parameter
set to Outdoor->Indoor (for instance).
2. by setting for UMTSFddNeighbouringCell/C child object of FDDCell/A its umtsNeighRelationId parameter
value set to Outdoor->Indoor.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 25
Neighboring:
DCH: max 96 (32 intra-freq + 32 inter-freq + 32 GSM)
Idle, PCH, FACH: max (intra-freq + inter-freq + GSM)
Max 96 if isEnhancedSib11Allowed = True
Max 48 if isEnhancedSib11Allowed = False
isSib11MeasReportingAllowed:
True: the UE will use intra-freq neighboring in SIB11/SIB12 in DCH state (in addition to idle, PCH,
FACH) until it receives the list in an RRC measurement control message.
False: when the UE enters the DCH state, it must wait for the RRC measurement control message to
get the measurement list.

If isEnhancedSib11Allowed is set to FALSE, the SIB11 neighboring list shall usually be a subset of the
Cell_DCH connected mode neighboring list.
The algorithm used to build SIB11 and RRC Measurement Control, for 3G frequency measurements is set by the
value of sib11AndDchNeighbouringFddCellAlgo:
classic (or unset): no distinction between SIB11 and DCH neighboring lists.
manual: the RNC reads Sib11OrDchUsage to compute the neighboring lists
automatic: the RNC automatically chooses intra-frequency neighboring cells broadcasted in SIB11 (not
supported in this release).
Manual algorithm is preferred to declare and control correctly the list of neighboring cells, thus allowing to make
differentiation between the configuration of SIB11 neighborhood (i.e. while in idle, PCH and Cell_FACH modes)
and Cell_DCH connected mode neighborhood.
The differentiation is set through the Sib11OrDchUsage parameter on each UmtsFddNeighbouringCell and
GsmNeighbouringCell.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 26
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.2 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 2 · Page 27
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 4
Page

1 Radio bearers 7
1.1 Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) 8
1.2 Conversational radio bearers 9
1.3 Streaming radio bearers 10
1.4 Interactive/background radio bearers 11
2 Services 13
2.1 Mono and multi-RAB services - examples 14
2.1.1 DCH 16
2.1.2 HSxPA 17
3 Multi-rate AMR 19
3.1 AMR NB configurations 20
3.2 AMR NB TB definition 21
3.3 AMR WB TB definition 22
3.4 UL AMR codec mode adaptation 23
3.5 Multi-rate AMR activation – NB and WB 24
3.6 Multi-Rate AMR call setup 25

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 7
SRB_CellFACH is used for:
Registration (LA/RA/URA/Cell Update)
Detach
Originating Low Priority Signaling (Originating SMS)
Terminating Low Priority Signaling (Terminating SMS)
SRB_3_4K_DCH is used for Emergency call.
SRB_13_6K_DCH is used for any other causes before Traffic RB(s) is (are) setup:
Originating/Terminating conversational call
Originating/Terminating streaming call
Originating/Terminating interactive call
Originating/Terminating background call
Call re-establishment
Inter-RAT cell reselection
Inter-RAT cell change order
Originating/Terminating High Priority Signaling
Terminating cause unknown
SRB_EDCH is used for HSUPA Category 6 UE using a minimum 2xSF2 plus 2xSF4 configuration and if 2 ms TTI
is used.

The SRB #5 for AMR rate control (SRB_5_AMR) is not supported in UA07. Thus, the flag isSrb5Allowed must be
set to false.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 8
The standard voice call consists of two narrowband (300-3400 Hz) sound channels, one in each direction, and
that operate independently.
CS_AMR_NB stands for AMR Narrow Band RB for which AMR NB voice codecs used allow a DL SF of 128
if AMR RAB is not multiplexed with another RAB.
CS_AMR_LR stands for AMR Low Rate RB for which AMR LB voice codecs used allow a DL SF of 256 if
AMR RAB is not multiplexed with another RAB.
CS_14_4K RB corresponds to the CS data service also provided in GSM networks.
CS_57_6K RB corresponds to the CS data service also provided in HSCSD GSM networks.
CS_64K RB corresponds to the Video Call service not available in GSM networks.

Note: CS_64K_SCUDIF RB “Switching between Video and Speech” is optionally supported from UA07.1.2.

CSD - Conversational Data Service


SCUDIF - Service Change and UDI/RDI Fallback (3GTS 23.172)
VT - Video Transmission

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 9
PS_xxx_STR RB >= 256 kbps are provided for High Quality streaming services which require a higher bandwidth.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 10
PS_xx_IB_MUX RB corresponds to a UE having simultaneously several PS RABs established.
In certain situations, UTRAN has to manage two simultaneous PS Interactive/Background RABs for a given user
identified by a single RRC connection:
A user activates a primary PDP context and a secondary PDP context in order to open bearers with different
qualities of service towards a given Access Point Name (APN).
A user activates two primary PDP contexts, each of them corresponding to a different APN.
In case of 2-PS-RAB-configuration, the two RLC flows are multiplexed at MAC layer into a single Mac-d flow.

PDP 1 PDP 2
RAB 1 RAB 2 DCCH
Example:
DL 64 DL 64 DL
3,4

DCH DCH
DL 64 DL
SF32 3,4

DPCH
SF32

UA08: new RAB combinations:


This feature introduces the new RAB combinations:
3 PS I/B RABs handling over HSUPA/HSDPA (E-DCH/HS-DSCH)

3 PS I/B over HSDPA (one streaming RAB + 2 PS I/B)

3 PS I/B Mux over DCH

UL 384+384 Mux (the existing support is only 128+128 Mux for UL)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 11
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 12
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 13
Before UA07, CS AMR NB versions were NB1: [12.2, 7.95, 5.9, 4.75] and NB2: [10.2, 6.7, 5.9, 4.75]
From UA07 onwards, CS NB2 becomes [12.2, 7.4, 5.9, 4.75]

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 14
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 15
UA08: new RAB combinations:

This feature introduces the new RAB combinations:

3 PS I/B RABs handling over HSUPA/HSDPA (E-DCH/HS-DSCH)

3 PS I/B over HSDPA (one streaming RAB + 2 PS I/B)

3 PS I/B Mux over DCH

UL 384+384 Mux (the existing support is only 128+128 Mux for UL)

Additionally, multi-service configurations are supported with:

CS Voice AMR NB (UL/DL 12.2 kbps or 12.2/7.95/5.9/4.75 kbps or 12.2/7.4/5.9/4.75 kbps, with VAD/DTX)

CS Voice AMR WB (12.65/8.85/6.6 kbps with VAD/DTX)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 16
PS Streaming on HSDPA
UL: 16, 32, 64, 128
DL: Max Bit Rate depending on UE Category & GBR

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 17
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 18
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 19
The Multi-rate AMR feature consists of the introduction of a certain number of Multi Mode configurations of the
AMR for the speech service.
A: 12.2 + 7.95 + 5.9 + 4.75
B: 5.9 + 4.75
C: 4.75
D: 12.2 + 7.4 + 5.9 + 4.75
E: 12.2
All these configurations can be used together with I/B PS services but B and C; the latter ones are foreseen for a
usage with Spreading Factor 256 in DL, e.g. in capacity limited networks.
Configuration E is intended for legacy purposes. It is the only one, which is compatible with the Iu User Plane
Frame protocol V1 (see 3GPP TS 25.415). Other configurations required Iu UP FP V2.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 20
On the radio interface, one dedicated transport channel is established per class of bits, i.e. DCH A for Class A bits,
DCH B for Class B bits and DCH C for Class C bits. Thus, each class can be subject to a different error protection
scheme:

Class A contains the bits that are most sensitive to errors. Any error in these bits would result in a corrupted
speech frame, which would need error correction for proper decoding. It is the only class protected by a CRC.

Classes B and C contain bits for which increasing error rates gradually reduce the speech quality. However,
the decoding of an erroneous frame can be done without significantly degrading the quality.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 21
The wideband AMR codec consists in nine sources with bit rates of 23.85k, 23.05k, 19.85k, 18.25k, 15.85k,
14.25k, 12.65k, 8.85k, and 6.6k.
Only five modes are defined for telephony (23.85k, 15.85k, 12.65k, 8.85k, and 6.6k). The other modes are used
for other services (e.g., for MMS).

Supported AMR Wide Band configurations


From UA05.1, only TS 26.103 AMR-WB configuration #0 (Active Codec Set (ACS) 12.65 8.85 & 6.60) is
supported.
The spreading factor for downlink and uplink is similar to NB-AMR.
For mono services:
Downlink: 128
Uplink: 64
At AMR WB Call Setup, the Max Bit rate is initialized to the Max bit rate, which is 12.65.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 22
The new CS NB2 configuration (12.2, 7.4, 5.9, 4.75) is supported as a replacement of (10.2, 6.7, 5.9, 4.75) kbps.
AMR rate change
For Multi Mode configurations (i.e. A, B and D), the speech rate can change in UL and DL.
DL rate is set according to the rate of the Iu UP Frames received from the CN.
UL rate can change either on decision of the UE according to its TFCS selection function or on request of the
CS CN. This latter case can happen when TFO/TrFO is used in Mobile-to-Mobile calls.

AMR configuration at call set-up


The AMR configuration is selected according to the CS CN request at call setup. If the CN supports Iu UP FP
V1 only, configuration E will be used.
If it supports V2, it must indicate one of the A to D configurations.

AMR code mode adaptations occur in both UL and DL for configurations A, B, D for AMR-NB, and for AMR-WB:
In DL, the AMR rate adaptation occurs in the TFO/TrFO scenario when the distant UE changes its bit rate
(also when the RNC changes the max DL bit rate).
In UL, the UE can select a different AMR rate in case of coverage limit. The UE transmitted power is closed
to the maximum. In this case, the UE can reduce its AMR rate.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 23
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 24
The AMR configuration can be specified at call setup through the SRB #5 if present.
The SRB #5 contains the following information:
Signaling RB information to set up
Authorized TFC subset list to be used in UL.
SRB 5 is set up if all of the following conditions are met:
isCnInitiatedRateControlAllowed is “True”.
isSrb5Allowed is “True”.
Version 2 of Iu UP is selected.
At least two speech modes are selected (silent mode excluded).
The UE indicated 3GPP release (UE radio access capability / Access stratum (AS) release indicator) is
greater than or equal to the provisioned value of minUeRelForSrb5Amr.
Starting from UA07, SRB5 is not supported by ALU UTRAN, therefore isSrb5Allowed must be set to “False”, and
SIB2 is used to transfer AMR adaptation signaling instead of SRB5.
In UA05.0, the initial AMR codec used at call setup was fixed and equal to the maximum rate allowed among the
ones of the Multi-mode configuration used.
In UA05.1, the initial AMR codec used at call setup could be chosen by the operator thanks to the two following
parameters:
isMaxDlAmrRateConfiguredAllowed is the activation flag for control of the maximum downlink rate for
AMR Narrowband calls based on provisioned cell parameters.
maxDlAmrRateConfigured is the maximum downlink rate for Narrowband AMR calls in the cell.
isCsRabModificationForSpeechAllowed is the activation flag for CS RAB modification between AMR NB and
AMR WB configuration.
Currently, SRB5 is not used since it is not supported by all UEs.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 25
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.3 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 3 · Page 26
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 4
Page

1 UMTS measurement principles 7


1.1 Reported measurements 8
1.2 Measurements elaboration 9
1.3 Measurements activation 10
2 Main measurements 11
2.1 Cell sets 12
2.2 Power measurements 13
2.3 Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) 14
2.4 Path loss 15
2.5 QE and CRCI 16
3 NBAP measurement procedures 17
3.1 NBAP measurement initiation 18
3.2 NBAP measurement reports 19
3.3 Call Trace (CT) 20
3.4 Event triggered reports 21
3.5 Example: event A 22
4 RRC measurement procedures 23
4.1 RRC measurement initiation 24
4.2 Intra-frequency measurements reporting – periodical mode 25
4.3 RRC measurements on RACH 26
4.4 Fast measurements at call establishment 27
5 Event triggered reporting of RRC measurements 28
5.1 Intra-frequency measurements reporting – event mode 29
5.2 Events for active set management 30
5.3 Events for hard handover management 31
5.4 Events for Always-on and RB rate adaptation 32
5.5 Example: event 1A 33
6 In-Band measurement procedures 34
6.1 RACH & DCH FP measurements 35
7 Compressed mode 36
7.1 CM scope & methods 37
7.2 Need for compressed mode 38
7.3 High-level scheduling method 39
7.4 HLS activation 40
7.5 CM pattern sequences 41
7.6 Pattern sequence configuration 42
7.7 FDD Inter-Freq CM pattern 43
7.8 GSM Inter-RAT CM pattern 44

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 7
The Node B has to provide two types of measurements: common measurements and dedicated measurements.
These measurements are also called NBAP measurements because they are reported to the RNC using NBAP
messages.
Beside the NBAP measurements, the BTS also provides measurement results that are sent in-band.
The UE has to be capable of performing seven different measurement types: intra-frequency, inter-frequency,
inter-system, traffic volume, quality, UE-internal, and UE positioning. These measurements are also called RRC
measurements because they are reported to the RNC using RRC messages.
From UA05, the Node B only removes the contribution of HSDPA channels (it does not remove the E-DCH
contribution) to the power measurement. This leads to slight overestimation of the R’99 contribution and impact
DCH call admission control. This effect can be attenuated by increasing DCH admission threshold on power for
HSUPA cells.

Path loss (Inter System Measurements): this measurement figures in the reporting message in the UMTS
specifications but does not correspond to any measurement defined in the GSM specifications.
This measurement is not managed by the RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 8
Physical Layer provides measurements to the upper layers (Layer 3). For each measurement, a basic
measurement period is defined, which corresponds to the shortest averaging period and also to the shortest
reporting period, i.e. the Node B or UE cannot be required to report a measurement to the RNC in a shorter time
period.
Before reporting to the RNC, the Node B or UE Layer 3 performs a filtering operation averaging several
measurements and allowing them to create measurement reports with a period not necessarily equal to the basic
measurement period. The filtering parameter a is defined as a = 1/2k/2, where k is the parameter received in the
Measurement Filter Coefficient IE.
The reporting period for each measurement is configured by the RNC when the UE or the Node B is requested to
perform measurements. The minimum reporting period for each measurement is equal to the basic measurement
period for this measurement. In general, the reporting period is a multiple of the basic measurement period.
For UTRAN measurements reported in-band, the reporting period is the period at which frames are sent from the
Node B to the serving RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 9
Each FDDCell and NeighbouringRNC must have a pointer to one of the Measurement Configuration Classes,
stored under the RNC on which they depend upon.
The isEventTriggeredMeasAllowed parameter controls the activation of Full Event Triggered RRC
measurement reports per FDDCell.
The isInterFreqMeasActivationAllowed parameter controls the activation of inter-frequency RRC measurement
reports whether Inter-FDD or Inter-RAT neighboring cells are to be measured.
The IsInterFreqCModeActivationAllowed parameter controls the activation of the compressed mode for
inter-FDD neighboring cell measurements.
The isGsmCModeActivationAllowed parameter controls the activation of the compressed mode for inter-
RAT neighboring cell measurements.
When set to true, the UeInternalMeasurementQuantity parameter allows one to choose which measurement
type is selected among the three available types: ueTransmittedPower, utraCarrierRssi, ueRxTxTimeDiff.

Note: UeIntMeas is an optional object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 10
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 11
There are three different ways to classify the cells, which may be involved in handover procedures:
The cells belonging to the Active Set are the cells involved in the soft handover and that are communicating
with the UE.
The cells belonging to the Monitored Set, which do not belong to the active set, but are monitored by the UE
depending on the neighboring list sent by the UTRAN.
The cells belonging to the Detected Set, which are detected by the UE without belonging to the Active Set or
to the Monitored Set.
isDetectedSetCellsAllowed indicates if the cells of the detected set have to be taken into account for RRC Intra-
Frequency measurement management for the calls established in Event-Triggered Reporting Mode.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 12
CPICH Ec/No
CPICH Ec/No is the received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band, that is, it is identical
to the RSCP measured on the CPICH divided by the RSSI. The UE has to perform this measurement on the
Primary CPICH and the reference point is the antenna connector of the UE. This measurement is used for
cell selection and re-selection and for handover preparation.
CPICH RSCP
CPICH RSCP is the Received Signal Code Power on one channelization code measured on the bits of the
Primary CPICH. The reference point is the antenna connector at the UE. Although the measurement of this
quantity requires that the Primary CPICH is de-spread, it should be noted that the RSCP is related to chip
energy and not bit energy. This measurement is used for cell selection and re-selection and for handover
preparation, open loop power control and pathloss calculation.
GSM carrier RSSI
This measurement is the wide-band received measured on a specified GSM BCCH carrier. This
measurement is used for GSM handover preparation.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 13
SIR (Node B measurement)
The Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) is measured on a Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) after
radio link combination in the Node B. In compressed mode, the SIR should not be measured during the
transmission gaps.
SIR is defined as SF*(RSCP/ISCP) where SF is the spreading factor; RSCP is the Received Signal Code
Power, and ISCP is the Interference Signal Code Power.
This measurement is used in Power Control algorithms.
SIR Error
A SIR error is defined as SIR - SirTarget. SirTarget is the SIR value for the UL outer loop power control
algorithm.
This measurement is used to assess the efficiency of the UL outer loop power control.
SIR (UE measurement)
SIR is defined as (RSCP/ISCP)*SF/2
The reference point for RSCP and ISCP is the antenna connector. However, they can only be measured at
the output of the de-spreader as they assess the received power and the non-orthogonal reference received
on a particular code. It should be clearly understood that RSCP is though a wideband measurement, i.e. at
chip level. The narrow band measurement is RSCP * SF/2.
This measurement is used as quality estimation for the link (for downlink outer loop power control). It is sent
periodically, once every power control cycle and event are triggered to the RNC (RRC).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 14
The path loss is calculated by the UE and by the RNC using the following formula: Path Loss = Primary CPICH
Tx Power - P-CPICH_RSCP
The RNC does not ask the UE to send the path loss, because the RNC can calculate it directly.
The path loss calculated by the RNC is used for inter-frequency handover criteria evaluation.
The path loss calculated by the UE is used to define the initial PRACH power.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 15
CRC INDICATOR
The CRC indicator is attached to the UL frame for each transport block of each transport channel transferred
between the Node B and the RNC. It shows if the transport block has a correct CRC (0 = Correct,
1 = Not Correct). This measurement is used for frame selection in case of soft handover.
QUALITY ESTIMATE
The quality estimate is reported in-band in the UL data frames from the Node B to the RNC, and it is derived
from the Transport channel BER or Physical channel BER. If the IE QE-Selector is equal to:
Selected, then the Node B calculates the BER of the transport channel measured on DPDCH per TTI.
If no DPDCH is sent, then the Node B will use DPCCH BER.
Non-selected, then the Node B calculates the BER of the physical channel measured on DPCCH per
TTI.
In case of soft handover, the quality estimate is needed in order to select a transport block when all CRC
indications are showing bad (or good) frames. The RNC compares the QE value with the qeThreshold (static
parameter) in order to choose the best transport block.
Quality Estimate can also be used to enhance the UL Outer Loop Power Control mechanism.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 16
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 17
Depending on the type of measurement (common or dedicated), measurement requests are initiated by the
controlling RNC by sending a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST or DEDICATED
MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST to the Node B.
The common and dedicated measurement messages both contain the following information elements to define
the measurements to be performed:
A measurement id uniquely identifies each measurement.
A measurement object type indicates the type of object on which the measurement is to be performed, e.g.,
cell, RACH, time slot, etc. It can be common or dedicated according to the message. In the case of a
dedicated measurement, either a radio link is identified on which the measurement has to be performed or
the measurement should be performed on all radio links for the Node B.
A measurement type indicates which measurement is to be performed. It is also common (Received total
wideband power, transmitted carrier power, Acknowledged PRACH preambles, etc.) or dedicated (SIR,
transmitted code power, In-Band (transport channel BER, physical channel BER), etc.).
A measurement filter coefficient gives the parameter for the layer 3 filtering to be performed before the
measurement can be reported.
The report characteristics give the criteria for reporting the measurement. The reporting is on demand,
periodic or event-triggered.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 18
The reports are sent in the COMMON MEASUREMENT REPORT, on criteria defined by the report
characteristics given in the measurement request.
For these Common Measurements, the type of measurement report is defined by the commonRepType
parameter [on demand, periodic, event-triggered].

The quantity measured is defined by the measQuantity parameter.


The periodicity is given in the Report_Periodicity IE of the measurement request message.

The periodicity is given in the Report_Periodicity IE of the measurement request message; it corresponds to the
CommonMeasurementReportingPeriod parameter for DL Transmitted Carrier Power and DL Transmitted
Carrier Power of all Codes, which are not used for HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, or E-HICH
transmission.
nbapCommonMeasRtwpReportingPeriod is the reporting period to be applied to UL RTWP
measurements.

CommonMeasurementFilterCoef is the filtering coefficient to be applied to DL Transmitted Carrier Power and


DL Transmitted Carrier Power of all codes not used for HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, or E-HICH
transmission measurements.
nbapCommonMeasRtwpFilterCoeff is the filtering coefficient to be applied to UL RTWP measurement

The measurements reporting by the Node B stop upon reception of COMMON MEASUREMENT TERMINATION
REQUESTs sent by the CRNC if any.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 19
In the case of Dedicated Measurements, three different types of measurements reports are supported (SIR, “DL
TRANSMITTED CODE POWER”, and “ROUND-TRIP-TIME”). For Call Trace purposes, these three types of
reports can be activated separately and can be configured with different periodicities.
The procedure is initiated with a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message sent from the
RNC to the Node B. This procedure is used by an RNC to request the initiation of measurements on dedicated
resources (all UE radio links managed by FDDCells belonging to this Node B).
Upon reception, the Node B shall initiate the requested measurement according to the parameters given in the
request and shall periodically send a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT REPORT.
The procedure is operational as long as the RL is established. The RNC does not send a DEDICATED
MEASUREMENT TERMINATION REQUEST message. Instead, even though the trace session is deleted, the
NBAP dedicated measurement reporting, if initiated, will remain until the radio links associated with the call being
traced are deleted or released.

Round trip time (RTT) is defined as: RTT = TRX - TTX, where:
TTX = the time of transmission of the beginning of a DL DPCH frame to a UE.
TRX = the time of reception of the beginning (the first detected path in time) of the corresponding UL
DPCCH/DPDCH frame from the UE.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 20
The NBAP event triggered report mode is only used in the scope of iRM scheduling downgrade/upgrade
procedures with the RNC perspective to retrieve the transmitted code power by the Node B for a particular radio
link (user) and to order the radio bearer downsizing/upsizing through iRM scheduling towards the more adapted
bit rate to guarantee service continuity.
For the purposes of iRM scheduling, the RNC configures the Node B with one Event A and two Events B:
Event A indicates that the radio conditions have become bad enough to attempt a downgrading to the
fallback radio bearer in order to maintain a good radio link quality.
Event B1 indicates that the radio conditions have become good enough to attempt an upgrading towards the
original requested RB.
Event B2 indicates that the radio conditions have become good enough to consider an upsizing towards a
relative lower bit rate than the requested RB to maintain a good radio link quality.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 21
In order to be able to perform IRM Scheduling downgrade, the RNC configures the NBAP dedicated
measurement by event A report for this UE on the primary cell.
So, each time the primary cell changes, the RNC terminates measurements on the old primary cell and initiates
measurements on the new primary cell.

Event A configuration relies on:


Measurement Threshold: the relative transmitted code power threshold given by the parameter
thresholdDelta is used to compute the absolute TxCP Threshold together with the pcpichPower (FDDCell)
and maxDlTxPowerPerOls (DlUsPowerConf) parameters.
Measurement Hysteresis: timeToTrigger.
So Event A is reported when the transmitted code power is above the TxCP absolute threshold during at least the
time to trigger.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 22
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 23
In Cell_FACH, CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, the UE is informed of the measurements to perform via the
system information broadcast on the P-CCPCH.
When the UE is in CELL_DCH state, UTRAN starts a measurement in the UE by sending the MEASUREMENT
CONTROL message, which includes the following information elements to define measurements to perform:
measurement id is a reference number to be used when modifying or releasing measurement.
measurement command indicates the action performed on the measurement (set up a new measurement,
modify the characteristics of a measurement, etc.).
measurement type indicates one of the different types of measurement: inter-frequency, intra-frequency, etc.
measurement object indicates the object on which the measurement shall be performed.
measurement quantity indicates the quantity to be measured (RSCP, SIR, etc.).
measurement reporting quantity indicates quantities that the UE should report together with the
measurement quantity; for example, the measurement quantity that triggered the report.
measurement reporting criteria indicates the type of reporting that is, periodical or event-triggered.
reporting mode specifies whether the UE shall transmit the measurement report using the acknowledged or
unacknowledged RLC mode.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 24
The MEASUREMENT REPORT message is sent from the UE to the UTRAN and contains the measurement id,
the measured results, and the measurement event result, which was required to be reported.
When the rrcIntraFreqMeasurementReportingPeriod time has elapsed, the UE shall send the computed
measurement.
Reporting Quantities
The RNC requests the following quantities to be reported by the mobiles:
“Cell Synchronization information”: provides the difference between SFN of the reported cell and CFN
as observed by the UE.
CPICH Ec/No: the received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band.
CPICH RSCP: the received power on one code measured on the Primary CPICH.
Other reporting quantities are also supported by UTRAN and are also requested to the UE for tracing
purposes:
SFN – SFN observed time difference "type 2": the relative timing difference between cell j and cell i
measured on the primary CPICH.
The RepMode parameter indicates that the UE shall report measurements on cells of the active set and
intrafrequency monitored set cells. This STATIC parameter is set to
ACTIVE_SET_AND_MONITORED_ON_FREQ.
The maxCellsRepType parameter indicates the number of measured cells belonging to the monitored set. This
STATIC parameter is set to 6.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 25
Measurements reported in the RACH message are used by power allocation and RAB assignment algorithms.

The measQuantity static parameter determines the type of reported measurements. Only the value
CPICH_Ec/No is supported by the measQuantity static parameter.

The sib11IntraFreqMeasurementNbrOfCellOnRACH parameter indicates how many cell measurements shall


be reported in the RACH message, including the current cell; for instance the current cell plus the best four
measured neighbors.
The compound neighbor list feature uses the number of reported cells on RACH to create the neighboring list for
the first Measurement Control Message. As specified by 3GPP 25.212, no filtering is performed for the
measurements reported in RACH.

Note: For parity reasons, sib11IntraFreqMeasurementNbrOfCellOnRACH is set to the “currentCell” value in


USA customer templates.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 26
This feature allows UTRAN to provide intra-frequency measurements configuration information to UEs, which are
in Idle Mode or in Cell-FACH. Received within the SIB11, information is used by UEs to activate intra-frequency
measurements just after entering the Cell-DCH state, with no need to wait for the first Measurement Control.
If the reporting mode is “Event Triggered”, only Event 1A is configured in the SIB11, and the UE sends the first
Measurement Report only if the 1A Event has been reached. The rest of the events are configured in the first
RRC Measurement Control message. Event1AHoConfInSIB11 dedicated object has been created under
HoConfClass so that specific 1A setting can be broadcast in SIB11 for faster measurements.
If the reporting mode is “Periodic”, the UE keeps on sending reports at the defined period until reception of the
first RRC Measurement Control.
The first RRC Measurement Control message sent to the UE is of type SETUP instead of MODIFY in order to
ensure that there is no misalignment between the UE and the Network.
The UE starts sending measurements when its state changes:
from Idle mode to Cell-DCH (after the RRC Connection Setup)
from Cell-FACH to Cell-DCH (after the RRC RB Setup).

If isSib11MeasReportingAllowed is set to “True”, SIB11 (but also SIB12 if Sib12Enable is set to “True”)
includes the 3GPP TS 25.331 “Intra-Frequency Measurement Quantity” and “Reporting information for state
CELL_DCH” Information Elements (IEs), which allow the UE to configure the intra-frequency measurement
reporting mode until reception of the RRC Measurement Control message.
If isSib11MeasReportingAllowed is set to “True”, the serving cell has to be present in the neighboring intra freq
cells list present in SIB11, thereby reducing the maximum number of neighbor cells by 1.
If isSib11MeasReportingAllowed is set to “False”, SIB11 and SIB12 do not include these IEs and the UE must
wait for the first RRC Measurement Control to measure neighboring cells when entering Cell_DCH.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 27
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 28
The MEASUREMENT REPORT message is sent from the UE to the UTRAN and contains the measurement id,
the measured results, and the measurement event result, which triggered the report.

Reporting Quantities
The RNC requests the following quantities to be reported by the mobiles:
CPICH Ec/No: the received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band.
CPICH RSCP: the received power on one code measured on the Primary CPICH.
In case or Event Measurements Reported for UE tracing, then up to three out of the best detected cells can
be reported in some of the Events.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 29
3GPP specifications define two RRC measurements reporting modes: periodical reporting and event-triggered
reporting.

For the event triggered reporting mode, RRC standards define a set of events for each type of measurement:
Events 1X are defined for intra-frequency measurements
Events 2X are defined for inter-frequency measurements
Events 3X are defined for inter-RAT measurements
Etc.

Event-triggered reporting is used in Alcatel-Lucent UTRAN for RRC intra-frequency reporting measurements.
The use of event triggered reporting for intra-freq measurements has a direct impact on the following
mechanisms:
primary cell determination
active set management
radio link color determination

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 30
In ALU UTRAN:
RRC inter-frequency measurements on a used frequency are event-triggered (2D and 2F).
RRC inter-frequency measurements on a non-used frequency are periodical.
RRC inter-RAT measurements are periodical.
RRC UE internal measurements are event-triggered (6A and 6B).

The use of event triggered reporting for inter-freq measurements on used frequency and UE internal
measurements has a direct impact on the following mechanisms:
alarm measurement criteria (Compressed Mode and Hard handover triggering).
inter-frequency or inter-RAT blind handover.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 31
In ALU UTRAN, RRC UE Traffic Volume measurement is event-triggered (4A).

The use of event triggered reporting for UE Traffic Volume measurements has a direct impact on the following
mechanisms:
Always-on upsize from FACH to DCH.
RB Rate Adaptation upsize from a given DCH bit rate to a higher one.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 32
Event 1A is triggered when a new P-CPICH enters the reporting range.
Event 1A is used to add an RL based on relative criteria when the Active Set is not full.
The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
MNew is the measurement result of the cell entering the reporting range.
CIONew is the individual cell offset for the cell entering the reporting range if an individual cell offset is stored
for that cell. Otherwise, it is equal to 0.
Mi is a measurement result of a cell not forbidden to affect reporting range in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect reporting range in the current active set.
MBest is the measurement result of the cell not forbidden to affect reporting range in the active set with the
best measurement result, not taking into account any cell individual offset.
W is a parameter sent from UTRAN to UE.
R1a is the reporting range constant.
H1a is the hysteresis parameter for event 1A.

By default, event 1A is triggered by cells belonging to the monitored set.


In order to help the operator efficiently monitor its network and optimize its neighboring plan, it is possible to
trigger this event 1A based on both Detected Set and Monitored Set.
In order to achieve this, the isDetectedSetCellsAllowed parameter shall be set to True.
From UA07 onwards, the decision if the cells from Detected Set are used in the mobility algorithms
depends on the detectedSetCellAddition flag.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 33
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 34
The propagation delay is reported in the RACH data frames transferred from the Node B to the RNC when a
successful RACH procedure has happened and the RACH has been sent from the UE to the RNC.

The CRC Indicator is attached to the UL frame for each transport block of each transport channel transferred
between the Node B and the RNC. It shows if the transport block has a correct CRC.

The Quality Estimate is reported in band in the UL data frames from the Node B to the RNC. This QE
corresponds either to the transport channel BER, or to the physical channel BER when no transport channel BER
is available, that is, there is no data transmitted in the UL thus only DPCCH is transmitted.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 35
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 36
The Compressed Mode consists of the creation of regularly spaced short gaps (less than one 10-ms radio frame)
in transmission in the uplink or downlink, or possibly both at the same time, and/or reception without altering the
data to be exchanged on the radio interface.
The Compressed Mode is mandatory in downlink and optional in uplink. It can only be achieved on dedicated
channels. The Transmission Gap Length is 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, or 14 slots.
Three methods are proposed in the standard: Spreading Factor Reduction, Puncturing, and Higher Layer
Scheduling.
Only the Spreading Factor Reduction method is implemented for both UL and DL (when needed) for either GSM
or FDD inter-frequency measurements:
Thus, only the value cmodeDlMethodSfDiv2 is allowed for DlCModeMethod and UlCModeMethod. Two
methods can be used for time transmission reduction.
The SF can be reduced by 2 to permit the transmission of the information bits in the remaining time slots of
the compressed frame. In that case, the scrambling code could be different from the normal mode.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 37
The real need for Compressed Mode is provided by the UE itself. Following a network request through the UE
Capability required indicator in the RRC Connection Setup message, the UE indicates in the UE Radio Access
Capability IE (Measurement Capability sub-IE, provided in the RRC Connection Setup Complete message) if the
Compressed Mode is needed in either UL or DL for the FDD and GSM bands.
The network configures and activates the Compressed Mode in three possible modes:
Uplink only
Downlink only
Uplink and Downlink

Therefore, regarding CM for GSM, in order not to configure the compressed mode in every case, a set of flags
indicates the frequency bands of the FDD and GSM neighboring cells. The RNC uses this set of flags to
determine whether the Compressed Mode is needed or not.

Each flag indicates that there exists at least one GSM cell of the corresponding frequency band in the access
network (that is, not only being part of the GSM neighboring lists seen by the RNC) to which handovers from a
3G cell are supported by the network. Therefore, if the Compressed Mode is needed by the mobile for that
frequency band, it will be configured accordingly and possibly activated by the network.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 38
The Spreading Factor Reduction method consists of the creation of gaps in transmission / reception and granting twice the
bandwidth for compressed frames in order to compensate for the loss of bandwidth in not transmitted frames. This method
applies for both uplink and downlink with fixed or flexible position mapping but it requires that the spreading factor be strictly
greater than 4.
The SF is reduced by a factor two for as many slots as used for gaps and the transmitted power of these slots is increased. In
this way, the OVSF code needs to be changed. The new one is the parent code of the code used for non-compressed radio
frames.
In downlink, the scrambling code management is done through the alternate scrambling code method. This method consists
in applying the new channelization code with SF/2 to the compressed frames, while applying one of the two available
alternate scrambling codes (left or right alternative) depending on the original OVSF.
The figure above gives an example of how this method applies.
In uplink, the compressed mode method by spreading factor reduction is identical to the spreading factor reduction used in
the downlink but with some exceptions.
HLS introduced from 3GPP R’99:
Data rate is reduced from higher layers (i.e. MAC) by means of TFC restriction in the TFCS.
SF and scrambling code remain unchanged.
No additional power transmission to keep the same level of protection of the user bit.
Applicable either in UL only, DL only, or both UL/DL.
Prior to UA06, only SF/2 method was supported, whatever RAB, and CM method was uniquely defined using the
dlCModeMethod and ulCModeMethod parameters under the CModePatternSeqInfo object.
In UA06, HLS has been introduced and is supported for some specific UL and/or DL User Services. Therefore, the previous
parameters are not used anymore and are replaced by the isHlsCmMethodPreferred parameter defined per DlUserService
and UlUserService.
Parameters defined under CModePatternSeqInfo are no longer used. However, they are still present in the RAN Model and
will be removed in the coming releases.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 39
In UA06.0 implementation, HLS is limited to only certain combinations:
PS I/B (mono or MUX) > 8 kbps
CS speech + (PS I/B > 16 kbps)
CSD64 + (PS I/B > 64 kbps)
(PS streaming > 64 kbps) + (PS I/B > 32 kbps) with or without CS speech
Any other PS combination over DCH with SF=4
SF/2 method is used for the remaining User Services, mostly:
Standalone SRB, CS speech, CSD, PS streaming (with or without CS speech)
All RAB combinations over HSDPA or E-DCH (for which HLS is in restriction)
Patterns are the same for SF/2 and HLS methods
CM method is determined at each RAB addition, deletion, or reconfiguration
Sent to UE and Node B at CM configuration
NBAP RlSetup/Reconf and RRC RadioBearerSetup/Reconf/Release
Based on RNC and NeighbouringRnc activation flags
isHlsCModeAllowed under RadioAccessService
isHlsCmAllowedOnDrnc under NeighbouringRnc
Reconfiguration to SF/2 when not supported/allowed on DRNC
Based on operator's strategy
isHlsCmMethodPreferred defined per DlUserService and UlUserService
When selecting a CM method, the RNC checks isHlsCmMethodPreferred with respect to the method(s) supported in
UA06.0 by this UserService
Hardcoded in the RNC for each UserService (SF2, HLS, SF2ANDHLS or N/A)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 40
The Compressed Mode is controlled by the UTRAN: it is configured by the RNC on a per UE basis in the form of
Compressed Mode Transmission Gap Pattern Sequences. A CM pattern sequence may be composed of up to
two sub-patterns and is dedicated to one specific measurement purpose.
Each pattern is described by the parameters listed below, those parameters being defined at the cell level:
TGL1 and TGL2: length of transmission gaps 1 and 2 expressed as a number of slots. Possible values are 3,
4, 5, 7, 10, and 14. TGL2 is an optional parameter and if a value is not given by the upper layers, then by
default TGL2 = TGL1,
TGSN: the first gap occurs TGSN slots after the beginning of the pattern,
TGD: the two gaps are separated by a distance of TGD slots,
TGPL1 and TGPL2: length of pattern 1 and 2 expressed in radio frames,
TGCFN: CM start expressed in CFN as CFNx + TgcfnOffset) mod[256],
TGPRC: the number of times the Transmission Gap Pattern is repeated within the Transmission Gap Pattern
Sequence.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 41
A certain number of pattern sequences can be defined in the UTRAN configuration, each of them being
associated with a specific measurement purpose.
The pattern sequence is defined by a set of parameters (transmission GAP and CM patterns parameters), that
are grouped into the CModePatternSeqInfo object:
Instance 0 of CModePatternSeqInfo corresponds to a Compressed Mode measurement purpose GSM RSSI
Measurements.
Instance 1 of CModePatternSeqInfo corresponds to a Compressed Mode measurement purpose GSM Initial
BSIC Identification.
Instance 2 of CModePatternSeqInfo corresponds to a Compressed Mode measurement purpose FDD Inter-
Frequency Measurement.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 42
For FDD inter-frequency measurement, a single pattern of six frames repeated 50 times is used, leading to a
basic compressed mode measurement period of 3 s.

The UE is provided with the FDD neighboring cell list, when receiving the RRC Measurement Control message.
Using this list, the UE starts the CPICH_RSCP and CPICH_Ec/No measurement processes that can be seen as
a sort of endless loop, intending to identify the best neighboring cells.

Measurement results are sent to the RNC with periodical measurement reports.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 43
In the case of GSM initial BSIC identification, the UE is to take the results of the most recent set of GSM RSSI
samples and attempt to identify the BSICs of the eight strongest cells, proceeding in single strength order.
It has to be noted that the time required for a measurement report is essentially dictated by the time required to
identify the BSICs of the required number of cells. Therefore, it is better to choose the compressed mode patterns
for this operation first and then build the patterns for GSM RSSI measurements around this pattern.
That is the reason why:
a transmission gap shorter that 14 has been chosen in order to allow good performance on BSIC
identification.
eight patterns of 6 x 10 ms have been allocated to RSSI measurements since the measurement period for
the GSM carrier RSSI measurement is 480 ms in the CELL_DCH state (as stated in [3GPP_R01]).
3 x 26 patterns have been allocated to initial BSIC identification in order to allow a minimum of 3 cells to be
reported in the worst case (e.g. when it takes up to nIdentifyAbort to identify each cell).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 44
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.4 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 4 · Page 45
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 4
Page

1 Paging 7
1.1 Paging DRX cycle 8
1.2 Paging repetition 9
2 Access preambles & acknowledgment 10
2.1 Preambles transmission 11
2.2 Acknowledgement transmission 12
2.3 Preambles retransmission parameters 13
3 RRC connection establishment 14
3.1 RRC connection setup 15
3.2 UL interference CAC on RACH 16
3.3 RRC connection rejection 17
3.4 RRC speech redirection 18
3.5 FACH power control as the type of DL traffic 22
3.5.1 FACH power adjustment 23
3.5.2 RRC connection setup repetition 24
4 RAB matching principles 25
4.1 RAB request vs. UserServices configuration 26
4.2 Matching main steps 27
5 RAB to RB set matching & TrCh type selection 28
5.1 Candidate RBset selection 29
5.2 Candidate RBset selection algorithm: speech 30
5.3 Candidate RBset selection algorithm: streaming 31
5.4 Candidate RBset selection algorithm: interact. /background 32
5.5 TrCh type selection 33
6 iRM CAC: target RAB determination 34
6.1 iRM selection 35
6.2 DL iRM target RB selection algorithm 36
6.3 DL iRM on radio link condition 37
6.4 DL iRM on cell color 38
6.5 DL cell color calculation 39
6.6 DL cell color/active set color calculation 40
6.7 DL target RB determination 41
6.8 DL iRM CEM load parameters 42
6.9 DL iRM table: example for PS_384K_IB radio bearer 43
6.10 DL iRM: exercise 44
6.11 UL iRM target RB selection algorithm 47
6.12 UL radio load estimation without RSEPS 48
6.12.1 Self-learning of RTWPref 49
6.12.2 Calculation in Node B 50
6.12.3 Calculation in RNC 51
6.13 UL load estimation with RSEPS: calculation in RNC 52
6.14 UL iRM on cell color 53
6.15 UL cell color calculation 54
6.16 iRM target UL RB rate determination 55
6.17 UL iRM radio load parameters 56
6.18 UL iRM CEM load parameters 57
6.19 UL iRM table parameters 58
6.20 Exercise: iRM UL 59
6.21 iRM CAC for PS streaming RAB 62
7 iRM CAC: admission control & resource reservation 63
7.1 UL radio load token for high data rate 64
7.2 UL RTWP on non E-DCH 65
7.2 Transport resource reservation – Equivalent Bit Rate 66
7.3 DL reserved power computation 67
7.4 DL power admission criteria 68

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 5
Page

7.5 DL power self tuning 69


7.5.1 Example 70
7.6 OVSF codes reservation & admission 71
8 Cell_FACH admission control 72
8.1 Cell_FACH admission control 73

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 7
When camping normally on a cell, the UE monitors regularly the paging channel. In order to save some energy, a
discontinuous reception mode (DRX) is used.
The DRX cycle is defined as the individual time interval between monitoring Paging Occasion for a specific UE.
The UE needs only to monitor one Page Indicator (PI) in one Paging Occasion per DRX cycle.
The DRX cycle length is defined as MAX(2k, PBP), where:
PBP is the Paging Block Periodicity and has the fixed value of 1 in UMTS-FDD.
k is an integer and can be specific by the Core Network domain.
The value of k is controlled in the Alcatel-Lucent’s solution by two parameters, one by the Core Network Domain:
csDrxCynLngCoef and psDrxCynLngCoef.
Since the UE may be attached to two different domains simultaneously, both DRX cycle length values are
calculated and stored in the UE from the values read in the SIB 1 (NAS system information, idle and connected
mode timers and counters). Then the UE should keep only the shortest of both values as the DRX cycle length it
will use.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 8
In areas of poor radio coverage, it can happen that UE miss paging request what translates into the subscriber
missing terminating calls. In order to cope with radio transmission losses, the UTRAN can repeat the paging
request to increase the probability for the UE to hear it.
Paging repetition is applicable to mobile in idle, CELL_PCH or URA_PCH states.
Alcatel-Lucent implements two algorithms:
Paging Record priority: When several paging records have to be sent at the same paging occasion, the
records are sent in the same RRC PAGING message. Nevertheless, if the number of records exceeds the
message size (i.e. more than 8 records), then the following priority will apply:
Priority 1: fresh paging record for packet or circuit services (i.e. no difference between the two
domains). A fresh paging record is a record, which has not been previously sent.
Priority 2: repeated paging record for packet or circuit services (no difference between the two
domains).
Limitation of repetitions: nrOfPagingRepetitions is the number of times a paging record is repeated. This is a
customer configurable parameter.
nrOfPagingRepetitions parameter: indicates the number of retransmissions of the paging by UTRAN. Specific
value 0 means that the paging will not be repeated (only the “fresh” paging is sent).

New UA07.1.2:
When searching for the next free Paging Occasion (PO) for a paging type 1, the RNC shall consider only POs
within the time given by the new parameter tPageVal. If no free PO is found within this time then the RNC shall
discard the paging.
The RNC timer tPageVal should be aligned with the core network (MSC and SGSN) paging repetition timers.
Notes:
A PO is considered as free if the paging message has room left to add the new paging.
If the feature paging repetition is enabled and a PO contains RNC repeated pagings then these are removed if
required to add the 'fresh' paging. This is existing UA05.0 functionality from feature 24075.
If paging repetition is enabled then the RNC shall schedule repeated paging only within time tPageVal.
If the value of parameter tPageVal is changed then the RNC shall keep already scheduled pagings unchanged.
The new value applies for new pagings only.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 9
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 10
UE PRACH use is composed of two parts: the preamble part and the message part.
Before transmitting the message part of the preamble, the UE waits for an acknowledgement from the network
(on the AICH) as a confirmation that the network has detected the UE.
The transmission of the preamble part consists of the repetition of a preamble composed of a 16-chip signature
repeated 256 times, resulting in a total of 4096 chips.

The UE uses one of the 16 possible preamble signatures and transmits it at increasing power, until it gets a
response from the network. The parameter preambleSignature of the RACH object defines the set of allowed
signatures of the PRACH preamble part.

The preambleThreshold parameter is defined as the threshold (in dB) over the interference level used for
preamble detection in the CEM card. (The real value in dB of the preamble threshold is given by the formula: -
36+0.5*preambleThreshold.)
The rachSubChannels parameter defines the set of access slots on which the mobiles are authorized to transmit
their access on the PRACH. It defines a sub-set of the total set of uplink access slots.
The aichTransmissionTiming parameter of the RACH object defines the timing relation between PRACH and
AICH channels.
The scrambling code of the PRACH preamble part is defined by the prachScramblingCode parameter of the
RACH object.
Note: The RACH preambleSignature is limited to 1 signature for iCEM128. The allowed signature will be
0000000000000001 or
1000000000000000 or
0000000100000000…

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 11
The aichTransmissionTiming parameter of the RACH object defines the timing relation between PRACH and
AICH channels.
For example, when aichTransmissionTiming is set to 1:
The minimum inter-preamble distance tp-p,min = 20480 chips (4 access slots)
The preamble-to-AI distance tpa = 12800 chips (5 time slots)
The preamble-to-message distance tp-m = 20480 chips (4 access slots)
Note: only aichTransmissionTiming = 1 is supported for iBTS (Global Market) and aichTransmissionTiming =
0 is supported for OneBTS (US Market).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 12
When a negative answer is received by the UE from the network after a given period, the UE re-sends a
preamble at a higher transmission power, so that the NodeB can detect it better among the other information
received. This “ramping up” process is thus characterized by:
Periodicity of the preamble retransmission: 3GPP (cf. 25.321) has defined two parameters: Nb01Min and
Nb01Max, setting respectively the lower and the upper bounds of the retransmission periodicity (unit is
expressed in tens of ms).
Maximum number of preambles transmitted: this limitation is defined through preambleRetransMax and
MMax parameters.
preambleRetransMax gives the maximum number of PRACH time slots allowed within an access
cycle.
MMax gives the maximum number of access cycles. An access cycle is defined by a number of radio
frames on which the PRACH access (and therefore a preamble ramping cycle) is allowed on specific
slot numbers.
The ramping process stops when the number of preambles transmitted has reached the maximum allowed
number of PRACH retransmissions, either within an access cycle, or when the maximum number of access
cycles is reached.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 13
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 14
When the UE attempt to establish an RRC Connection is accepted, the corresponding Signaling Radio Bearers
can be supported on two different RRC states and with two different throughputs:
Cell_FACH
CELL_DCH

The parameters UlUserviceId for the UL direction and DlUserserviceId for the DL direction allow selection of the
RRC state to support the Signaling Radio Bearers.

The selection of the SRB xxServiceId to accommodate the RRC connection is distinguished by RRC
establishment Cause (UserServices instance):
IMSI Detach, Registration, Originating Low Priority Signaling, Originating Low Priority Signaling:
SRB_CellFACH
Emergency Call: SRB_3_4K_DCH
Others (normal Originating and Terminating calls): SRB_13_6K_DCH

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 15
The overall interference level received in a cell is measured with the UL RTWP measurement (Received Total
Wideband Power measured at the NodeB and forwarded to the RNC).
On RACH reception, before the allocation of the standalone signaling radio bearer, and during the resource
reservation phase, the RNC compares the measured RTWP with a fixed value, the maxUlInterferenceLevel
parameter.
If the RTWP is below this threshold, the criterion is met.
If the RTWP is over the threshold, the call is rejected.
The RTWP is measured by the NodeB and sent towards the RNC by sending a “NBAP common measurement
report”.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 16
If RRC connection fails, the UE will re-attempt a 3G call establishment up to N300 times. However, the UE is
required to wait (at least) a predetermined time before the subsequent attempt on the 3G network. This wait time
is sent by the RNC to the UE in the Wait Time IE in the RRC Connection Reject message.
Subsequent call attempts may or may not be redirected to the 2G network, depending on whether the initial
cause for RRC Redirection persists on the 3G UTRAN.
The Wait Time parameter will be set to the value associated with one of the following parameters.
timeReject: If the admission failure which causes the redirection is “RNC overload”
waitTimeOnRrcConnectionRejection: If the admission failure which causes the redirection is “congestion”
waitTime3Gto2GRedirectFailure: In the case of a “3G-2G Emergency Redirection” or “3G-2G Redirection
based on cell load”

The waitTimeOnRrcConnectionRejection parameter is in seconds and the value 0 indicates that the repetition
is not allowed.

Notes:
SRB CAC: The RNC will check whether the required resources are available to support the SRB (e.g. power
and codes).
Max UE contexts: The RNC checks that the maximum number of concurrent UE contexts will not be
exceeded

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 17
Upon reception of the RRC Connection Request message, the RNC executes the usual RRC Connection
Admission Controls.
If failure occurs for SRB assignment, the RNC verifies that some pre-conditions for redirection to GSM are
fulfilled.
Then the RRC Connection Reject message contains the Redirection IE with Inter-RAT info set to “GSM”. Note
that the RNC is unaware of the UE capabilities at RRC Connection Request time. Therefore, the RNC attempts
an RRC Redirection independently of whether the UE supports GSM or the Redirection IE. If the UE supports
GSM and the Redirection IE, it will perform inter-system cell reselection and will re-originate the speech call on
the 2G network.

All types of MO Conversational calls are redirected to 2G upon admission failure independently of the service
type or domain. This includes non-speech calls such as Video Telephony. This is a consequence of the fact that
the RRC establishment cause is not able to identify definitely a CS speech at this early stage of the call
progression.

Redirection is not triggered if the UE already has an established RRC connection prior to invoking the MO call
request (for example when a PS call is already established).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 18
From UA07 onwards, this feature enables 3G/2G RRC redirection of CS Speech calls when the cell load on the
originating UMTS cell reaches a configurable threshold.

Calls are rejected and redirected to GSM.

Mobile then selects a GSM cell based on previously measured neighbouring cell list and retries a call
establishment.

This mechanism allows offloading 3G traffic to 2G before reaching CAC failure.

Compared to Load based Handover, this procedure does not consume any 3G resources.

Note on load colors: Green < Yellow< Red < Black

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 19
The RRC Connection Request initiated by the UE contains the establishment cause.

The other conditions that must be fulfilled are explained in the next slide.

If the call is eligible to the 3G-2G redirection criterion, an RRC Connection Reject is sent to the UE with
redirection info included and may include the GSM target cell info list IE.
The RNC always sends the GSM target cell Info List whatever UE release (R’99, R5, R6, and R7).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 20
For R5 & R’99 Mobiles, there is no differentiation in the RRC Connection IE between video & voice.
Therefore, the risk moving video calls to 2G has to be considered.

Upon receiving the RRC Connection Reject message from UTRAN, the UE will process the GSM cell selection
process using or not the GSM target cell info and will attempt an RACH on 2G if it finds an eligible GSM target
cell.

If no GSM cell fulfills the selection criteria, the UE will re-attempt a new RACH towards the UTRAN after the “wait
time” timer (waitTime3Gto2GRedirectFailure) has elapsed. The UE may camp on the same Fdd cell or another
Fdd cell (the cell reselection process may change the Fdd cell).

When the re-attempt occurs in the same FDDCell within a certain period of time (RrcCnxRepeatTime), the RNC
doesn’t redirect the call to the 2G and attempts to establish the call on the FDDCell thanks to a mechanism
(already used for all features dealing with RRC Redirection) at cell level which registers the UE identity before
launching the 3G 2G redirection. If the re-attempt occurs after the timer elapses or in a different FDDCell, the
RACH is managed as a first RRC establishment request.
2G load is not taken into account to take the decision to trigger the redirection.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 21
The feature differentiates the power level used for FACH channel depending on whether data or signaling is
transmitted.
From UA07, a Boolean switch allows choosing between the two alternative approaches.
It is possible for operator to choose one of the following options:
Power ramping for RRC Connection Setup message based on UE feedback and fixed (same) power for the
rest of signaling and traffic on FACH (UA05 onwards mechanism called FACH Power Adjustment and Quick
Repeat).
Configurable fixed (different) power level based on whether the FACH frame contains Signaling Radio
Bearer data or Traffic Radio Bearer data (new option from UA07).

isFachPowerDifferentForSrbTraffic allows one to enable/disable the use of the configured fixed power offset
based on whether the Radio Bearer is Signaling or Traffic.
If isFachPowerDifferentForSrbTraffic is TRUE, regardless of whether isFachPowerAdjustmentActivated
(flag to activate FACH power adjustment) is turned on or off, the configured FACH power offset values based for
SRB fachSrbPowerOffset or TRB fachTrbPowerOffset are used.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 22
It is proposed to adjust the FACH power while sending the RRC Connection Setup message based on the CPICH
Ec/No measurement received from the RRC Connection Request message. The preferred power setting change
is only applied to the FACH frames, which carry the RRC Connection Setup message. For other messages, the
RNC should set the power setting level to the nominal value.
Once the FACH power adjustment is required for the first RRC Connection Setup, at every next subsequent
repetitions (that is, T351 expiration), the FACH power is further stepped up.
The feature is activated at both the RNC (isFachPowerAdjustmentEnabled) and FddCell levels
(isFachPowerAdjustmentActivated).
If the quality measurements of either Ec/No (by default) or of RSCP sink below the threshold, the FACH power
adjustment is performed.

fachPowerAdjustmentCpichEcNoThreshold represents the absolute thresholds of P-CPICH quality


measurements, which activates the feature. If the value of Ec/No is below the threshold, the FACH power
adjustment is performed.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 23
The RRC Connection Setup message is sent over CCCH/FACH in RLC UM mode. Without its retransmission, the
message could be lost over the air due to bad RF conditions. The objective of this feature is to provide the RRC
Connection Setup message retransmission functionality if the RRC Connection Setup Complete message from
the UE has not been received within the duration of T351 timer.
The retransmission of the RRC Connection Setup message based on a quicker timer T351 than T300 reduces
the call setup duration. By reducing the need for the UE to submit another RRC Connection Request message
because of the expiry of timer T300, this feature has a positive impact to the RACH capacity.

This feature provides quick repetition functionality of the RRC Connection Setup message without waiting for the
acknowledgement from the UE (RRC Connection Setup Complete message).
The quick repetition of the RRC Connection Setup is activated based on the P-CPICH Ec/No measurement
received from the RRC Connection Request message reported by the UE.
Quality measurements are below a certain threshold by checking the following condition:
CPICH EC/No < fachPowerAdjustmentCpichEcNoThreshold + deltaCpichEcNoUsedQuickRepeat.

The likelihood of high BLER on the FACH channel is increased, thus reducing the probability of RRC Connection
Setup being successfully received by the UE, since it is sent on RLC UM. In order to increase the probability of
successful RRC Connection Setup transmission, the message is quick-repeated, that is to say, without waiting for
an acknowledgement.

T352 is the Alcatel-Lucent Timer to control the release of UE call context by the RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 24
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 25
Several Access Stratum configurations are supported.
They are split between downlink and uplink and may be dissymmetric.
At the RNC, each access stratum configuration is identified by an access stratum configuration Identifier or
UserServiceId. This identifier characterizes a set of radio bearers that are linked through a common radio
configuration, including therefore a signaling radio bearer (SRB) and a set of traffic Radio Bearers (RBs).

The objective of the RAB matching algorithm is to translate the RAB parameters specified in the RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST received from the Core Network into a pre-defined RAB supported in the RNC.
The requested RAB is matched to the closest RAB provisioned in the RNC, using the RAB matching algorithm.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 26
RAB Matching is done at call establishment. For soft handover, only resource reservation and Call Access
Control are performed.
The above diagram describes the main steps of the RAB Matching algorithm used.
Step 1: RAB to RBset Matching:
UL & DL RBs are selected according to the RAB Request and stored in an RB set.
This RB list is filtered according to UE capabilities.
Step 2: Transport Channel Type Selection:
DCH or HDSCH in DL, DCH or E-DCH in UL is selected according to the UE and cell capabilities
Step 3: iRM RAB to RB Mapping (DL only):
A DL Target RB is elected among all the selected RBs of the RBset.
Step 4: RBset to User Services Matching:
Target User Services are extracted and explicitly defined from the RBsets.
Reference User Services are extracted and explicitly defined from the RBsets.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 27
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 28
The Purpose of this algorithm is to get as output a radio bearer table containing all the acceptable Radio Bearers
(DL Candidate RBset and UL Candidate RBset), among which one is marked as the Reference RB in UL & DL.
These RBsets also include the RBs to be used for Always On and iRM Scheduling (when applicable).
From all Radio Bearers defined in the RNC, the RNC selects the Radio Bearers (DlRbSetConf and UlRbSetConf)
having the following properties:
It is eligible for RBset Matching (enabledForRabMatching).
The Traffic Class corresponds to the requested Traffic Class.
The Bit Rate is compliant with the RBset selection criteria (see next slide).
For PS Calls, the rule is to sort all eligible radio bearers in decreasing bit rate order, and to select the reference
radio bearer as being the first element in the top of the list.
Other radio bearers are kept as fallback radio bearers.

From UA06.0, RAB negotiation may be supported at establishment time. If the enableRabNegotiation flag is set
to True, the presence of the Alternative RAB Parameter Values IE is checked in the RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT
[3GPP_R18] or RELOCATION REQUEST message; if it is present with either Alternative MBR or Alternative
GBR then negotiating the Maximum Bit Rate or Guaranteed Bit Rate (Streaming class) respectively is allowed.
RAB matching and call admission is performed as normal and if the requested rate is not achievable, a lower data
rate may be selected. This is applicable to both Interactive/Background and Streaming RABs.
Note: The enableRabNegotiation activation flag shall be set to True only if the SGSNs in the CN support the
RAB negotiation facility with the Unspecified Type of Alternative Bit Rate.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 29
The allocation of bearer for voice call depends whether the multi-mode AMR is activated at RNC level:
If Traffic Class = Conversational and Source = Speech (Speech case)
Bit Rate (RBsetConf) = MaxBitRate (rabParam)
Bit Rate (RBsetConf) ≥ Guaranteed Bit Rate (rabParam)

The RNC shall determine the speech bearer according to the AMR activated modes:
CS_AMR_WB: • CS_AMR_NB: • CS_AMR_LR
o {12.65k, 8.85k, 6.6k} o {12.2k, 7.95k, 5.9k, 4.75k} o {5.9k, 4.75k}
o {12.2k, 7.4k, 5.9k, 4.75k} o {4.75k}

The following table shows an example of the CS Radio Bearer Table:

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 30
The following table shows an example of the Streaming Radio Bearer Table.

Note: Streaming over E-DCH is an optional feature/service supported from release UA07.1.2.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 31
From all Radio Bearers defined in the RNC, the RNC selects the Radio Bearers (DlRbSetConf and UlRbSetConf)
having the following properties:
It is eligible to RBset Matching (EnabledForRabMatching parameter)
The Traffic Class corresponds to the requested Traffic Class and:
If Traffic Class = Conversational and Source = Speech (Speech case)
Bit Rate (RBsetConf) = MaxBitRate (rabParam)
Bit Rate (RBsetConf) ≥ Guaranteed Bit Rate (rabParam)
If Traffic Class = Streaming
Bit Rate (RBsetConf) ≥ Guaranteed Bit Rate (rabParam)
If Traffic Class = Interactive or Background
Bit Rate (RBsetConf) ≤ MaxBitRate (rabParam)

The Candidate RBset Selection produces two Radio Bearers lists (one list for UL and one list for DL) that are
further filtered according to UE capability.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 32
This step aims to perform the transport choice decision:
DCH,
HSxPA,
FACH.
The decision is taken according to several rules:
CS RAB is always established on a DCH Channel.
For a R5 or R6 UE (HSDPA capable), the downlink PS I/B RB is preferred on HSDPA.
The downlink PS Streaming RB is preferred on HSDPA if streaming on HSDPA is activated.
For a R6 UE (HSUPA capable), the uplink PS I/B RB is preferred on HSUPA.
The uplink PS Streaming RB is preferred on HSUPA if streaming on HSUPA is activated.

Note: Streaming over E-DCH is an optional feature/service supported starting release UA07.1.2

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 33
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 34
According to the cell load (DL and UL) and radio conditions of the UE (DL only), from a Reference RB bit rate
deduced from CN QoS requirements, the RNC will determine, in UL and in DL, a Target RB bit rate in order to
avoid congestion in the cell.
iRM UL and iRM DL Tables are used for Target RB determination according to some criteria (see next
slides).

Besides, RB adaptation based on traffic is a feature introducing PS I/B RB bit rate downsizing/upsizing based on
user estimated average throughput.
DL and UL rate adaptation are performed independently.

In UL and/or DL, an initial RB Rate Adaptation can be performed at RAB establishment to admit a user at a
configurable low bit rate.
Consequently, the allocated UL PS RB bit rate and/or UL PS RB bit rate is limited at RAB Establishment, even if
the user is requesting more.
Once the RAB is established, it may be possible to upsize the RB to UL PS 384 kbps if needed thanks to RB
Adaptation:
"Max UL RB bit rate" ("Max DL RB bit rate") specifies the maximum UL rate (DL rate), which may be
allocated at service establishment time (RANAP RAB Assignment Request) or after relocation (RANAP
Relocation Request).
This parameter is significant when isUlRbRateAdaptationAllowed = True
(isDlRbRateAdaptationAllowed = True).
It depends on the activation of the "Initial Rate Capping during RB reconfiguration" feature:

isOamCappingOfDataAllowed = False isOamCappingOfDataAllowed = True

Max UL RB bit rate = maxUlEstablishmentRbRate maxUlRateRabEstablishDchAndDch


Max DL RB bit rate = maxDlEstablishmentRbRate maxDlRateRabEstablishDchAndDch

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 35
This step is applied only in the downlink.
The DL iRM Target RB selection algorithm is based on:
UE radio conditions, based on CPICH Ec/No and CPICH RSCP reported in the RRC Measurements.
The two colors Green and Red respectively represent good radio conditions and bad radio conditions.

Cell load through cell color computation from


the downlink OVSF code tree occupancy,
the downlink power used versus the available power,
the Iub load, and
the CEM processing load (D-BBU load).
The three colors green, yellow, and red are distinguished; green color means that the cell is not loaded,
and red color indicates a loaded cell.

Olympic Service Level (OLS) is either Gold or Silver or Bronze according to the Allocation/Retention
Priority IE provided in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message).

Once computed, the target downlink radio bearer is flagged as Target Radio Bearer.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 36
iRM Target RB selection shall be limited to fallbackRbRate in case of bad UE radio conditions in order to reduce
RLC re-transmissions and guarantee a minimum level of throughput.
Radio Link conditions are assessed from RRC measurements reported by UE.
Link color calculation is based on the following algorithm:
if (-CPICH Ec/N0 primary < IrmDlPowerThreshold) and (CPICH RSCP > IrmDlCoverageThreshold)
then link color = GREEN
else link color = RED
DL iRM Target RB bit rate is limited to fallbackRbRate if the radio link color is RED; otherwise, no limitation is
requested.

Note:
During transition from cell FACH state to Cell DCH state, CPICH RSCP is not reported by the UE, therefore …:
The coverage criterion (IrmDlCoverageThreshold) is ignored.
The Radio link color evaluation is then based only on CPICH Ec/No measurements as reported on the last
RACH message.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 37
RAB allocation management is based on FDDCell color and NodeB color.
FDDCell color is derived from a load calculation based on OVSF tree and DL power occupancy.
NodeB color is derived from an Iub bandwidth occupancy and CEM processing load.
Therefore, it provides means for a better management of cell resources.
At each allocation/release/reconfiguration of resources, the RNC calculates current:
code color based on OVSF code tree occupancy load
power color based on DL cell power usage
Iub color based on VCC allocated on Iub
CEM load based on credits usage.
Then a composite Cell color is derived, which is an input to iRM table.

isDlIubTransportLoadColourCalculationEnabled activates or deactivates the computation of downlink Iub load


color and its aggregation in the global cell color.
bwPoolcellColor controls whether Iub downlink usage will be included in the cell color.
irmIubLoadQos is a Bitmap of QoS to be taken into account for the iRM Iub Transport Load computation. Bit i
corresponds to QoS i (value 1: QoS to be taken in account; value 0: QoS not to be taken in account).

CEM load is not only used in the iRM CAC algorithm. Therefore, if CEM load criterion is not to be used in iRM
CAC although CEM load is being computed for iMCTA feature, then:
The isCEMColourCalculationEnabled parameter has to be set to TRUE
The isCEMModelValidForDlColour parameter has to be set to FALSE
In this case, the CEM Color used in iRM CAC will be equal to the dlCEMColourDefaultValue
parameter value.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 38
NOTE: The values provided here for the different Power load, Code load, Iub load, and CEM load are just
examples. They are neither Alcatel-Lucent default values nor recommended values as those ones are driven by
the configuration of NodeB and cell and by the operator strategy as a trade-off between capacity (number of
simultaneous users) and quality (throughput for PS service).
Indeed:
Code load thresholds setting is driven by the code capacity of the cell for DCH traffic; this depends on the
number of S-CCPCH channels configured, and on the activation of the feature Dynamic Code Tree
Management feature for HSDPA traffic.
Power load thresholds setting is driven by the power capacity of the cell for DCH traffic, which depends on
the usage of OCNS, and on the power reserved for HSDPA.
Iub load thresholds setting is driven by the Iub bandwidth capacity of the BTS, which depends on the number
of E1 links equipped, the IMA activation and the CAC method used.
CEM load thresholds setting is driven by the CEM capacity of the BTS, which depends on the type and
number of CEM boards equipped, on the number of Local Cell Group configured and on the DBBU
Frequency Pooling activation (dbbuPoolMode parameter).
CEM color in DL is calculated by the iRM mechanism comparing the DL CEM load estimation (expressed in
percent) with the different CEM DL load thresholds configured at OAM
Once computed, the CEM color is applied to all the cells of a BTS, cells belonging to the same Local Cell Group.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 39
Calculation of the cell load color:
This block allows code, power, and Iub occupancy to be taken into account in the calculation of cell color.
The cell load color is calculated as follows:
cell load color = Worst (radio load color, Iub load color)
radio load color = Worst (code load color, power load color)

Calculation of the active set cell load color:


When the call is in soft handover, the color taken into account is the active set color defined as the worst
color between the colors of the cells present in the active set. The active set load color is calculated as
follows:
active set color = Worst (cell (i) color, i Є [1…N])
where cell (i) is the cell of the active set and N is the active set size.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 40
The RAB to RB mapping function consists in defining the target RB Set that will replace the Reference RB.
For each triplet {DlRbSetConf, OLS, and CellColor}, an irmRbRate parameter is defined in a DL iRM Table:

DlRbSetConf
PS_384K_IB
PS_384K_IB_MUX
PS_256K_IB DlIrmTable
PS_ 256K_STR OLS Cell Colour Cell Colour Cell Colour
PS_128k_IB = Green = Yellow = Red
PS_128k_IB_MUX Gold 384 128 64
PS_128K_STR Silver 384 128 64
Bronze 384 128 64

DL iRM RB Selection chooses as Target RB bit rate the minimum between:


Reference RB bit rate deduced from CN requirements
Eventual fallbackRbRate is UE in bad radio conditions
irmRbRate given by DL iRM Tables

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 41
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 42
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 43
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 44
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 45
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 46
The aim of UL iRM CAC is to provide means to manage efficiently I/B and streaming RABs on R’99 resources as
a function of the following:
traffic conditions (through radio load color evaluated by the RNC thanks to Noise Rise estimated by the
NodeB and reported to the RNC)
CEM load (through CEM color)
OLS (Olympic Service Level is either Gold or Silver or Bronze according to the Allocation/Retention Priority
IE provided in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message).
Further reconfiguration can be triggered either by DL related events or by the UL RAB adapt feature.
This feature provides the operator with the best trade-off in terms of offered QoS and NodeB/Cell available
resources.
This minimizes blocking and call drops.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 47
The way to control the Uplink traffic QoS is to maintain the UL load under a fixed level.
The current absolute UL RTWP (i.e. Received Total Wideband Power) as defined in the 3GPP cannot be
measured with enough accuracy (+/- 4 dB). Indeed, it depends on the temperature and site conditions. It is
therefore varying in time.
Due to these constraints, UL load cannot be controlled based on direct UL RTWP measurements => Needs for
enhanced estimation.
Therefore in order to improve the accuracy of the R’99 UL CAC algorithm, the NodeB provides the RNC with the
Rise over the varying Thermal noise (RoT) corresponding to the Noise Rise induced by the UL R’99 traffic.
As the measurement provided by the NodeB in the Common Measurement Report should be the RTWP
expressed in dBm, the NodeB adds a fixed reference value equal to –106.1 dBm to the actual RoT.
The UL load should be monitored in order not to overload the system. It should be kept lower than a fixed
threshold to keep the system stable.
The UL load estimation is required for correct E-DCH scheduling and efficient UL iRM CAC.
The thermal noise should be well estimated in order to compute the UL load.

RSEPS: Received Scheduled E-DCH Power Share


When the RSEPS measurements are deactivated, the BTS reports only the RTWP measurements.
If we activate the RSEPS measurements, the RNC configures NBAP common measurements to report
periodically:
Total_RTWP
Reference_RTWP

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 48
The RTWP reference value (called RTWPref) should correspond to the minimum value of RTWP values received
in the cell when there are no connections in the NodeB.
During the learning time (24 hours), the NodeB keeps the RTWP cur values measured (filtered by L3
filtering- parameter sent by the RNC) if no traffic in the NodeB.
Please note that the first learning cycle is faster than 24 hours.

The feature self-learning of RTWP ref is used in the two cases: UL Radio Load Estimation Without RSEPS & UL
Radio Load Estimation With RSEPS.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 49
The non E-DCH load is obtained by subtracting this computed E-DCH load from the total RTWP.
For each E-DCH connection, the SIR will be estimated in function of the SIR on UL DPCCH and the gain
factors. These SIR are cumulated and then the contribution of E-DCH to the current total RTWP is estimated.
Note that the E-DCH traffic that belongs to other cells is included in the non E-DCH RTWP measurement.
The total RTWP cur is the average between the two RX diversity branches if any.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 50
The activation of UL RTWP measurement is not linked to the UL Load feature.
NBAP Common Measurements are activated at cell setup.
There is no way to put measurement off. Therefore, there is no need to lock / unlock any cell to activate
NBAP Common Measurements.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 51
When the RSEPS measurements are activated:
The RNC configures NBAP common measurements to periodically report:
Total RTWP
Reference RTWP
The RNC configures Received Scheduled E-DCH Power Share (RSEPS) measurements to report the E-
DCH power ratio.

WARNING: if RSEPS are activated, the #303 UL_RSSI counter gives the actual total RTWP whereas in UA05 it
corresponded to “-106.1 dBm + RoT_non_Edch”.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 52
As any other, the CEM load criteria can be used or not thanks to the isCEMColourCalculationEnabled parameter.
However, CEM load is not only used in iRM CAC algorithm. Therefore, if the CEM load criterion is not to be used
in iRM CAC although CEM load is being computed for iMCTA feature, then:
The isCEMColourCalculationEnabled parameter has to be set to TRUE.
The isCEMModelValidForUlColour parameter has to be set to FALSE.
In this case, the CEM Color used in iRM CAC will be equal to ulCEMColourDefaultValue parameter value.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 53
CEM color in UL is calculated by the iRM mechanism comparing the UL CEM load estimation (expressed in
percent) with the different CEM UL load thresholds configured at OAM
Once computed, the CEM color is applied to all the cells of a BTS, cells belonging to the same Local Cell Group.
NOTE: The values provided here for the different Radio load and CEM load are just examples. They are neither
Alcatel-Lucent default values nor recommended values as those ones are driven by the configuration of NodeB
and cell and by the operator strategy as a trade-off between capacity (number of simultaneous users) and quality
(throughput for PS service).
Indeed:
The setting of the Radio load thresholds is driven by the code capacity of the cell for DCH traffic, which
depends on the fact that the cell might also carry HSUPA traffic. Attention should be paid to the fact that
yellow2RedUlRadioLoadThreshold should be lower or equal to the UL CAC threshold
rtwpMaxCellLoadNonEdch.
CEM load thresholds setting is driven by the CEM capacity of the BTS, which depends on the type and
number of CEM boards equipped, on the number of Local Cell Group configured and on the DBBU
Frequency Pooling activation (dbbuPoolMode parameter).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 54
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 55
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 56
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 57
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 58
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 59
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 60
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 61
Alcatel-Lucent implements PS streaming Radio Bearers (RBs) since UA04.1. Support of Streaming RB allows
operators to differentiate streaming traffic from best effort traffic (i.e. Interactive and Background traffic) at the
transport level (e.g. Iub) or at RRM level, therefore providing streaming service of a superior quality compared to
when I/B RB are used.
When speaking about streaming quality, another important parameter is the rate at which the streaming content
has been encoded. For example, it is generally acknowledged that high quality video streaming on mobile device
requires data rate of around 100 kbps, and potentially more. In fact, high quality streaming content requires the
introduction of higher streaming RB bit rate such as 128 kbps or even 256 kbps. PS128kbps was introduced in
UA04.2 and PS256kbps was introduced in UA05.
Since high bit rate RBs are radio resources consuming, enhanced RRM is required to optimize radio resources
usage.
iRM CAC: same as for PS I/B RAB except that the allocated RB must be of a Bit Rate greater or equal to the
Guaranteed Bit Rate required by the SGSN for the PS Streaming RAB.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 62
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 63
The costs associated to each UlUserService have been evaluated using UL RSSI measurement and depend on
the data rate or spreading factor SF:
In order to control the admission for the high data rate (upon SF 8) and not the “low” data rate and to
guarantee the old network capacity for these services, the cost of the “low” data rate (SF greater than 8) is
set to zero.
For high data rate bearer (SF ≤ 8), the cost depends on the throughput and on the SF.

For high data rate calls, the uplink radio admission control has been introduced together with the UL PS384 RAB;
they enable an uplink call admission control mechanism, avoiding UL congestion.
Lab tests show that in ideal radio conditions three bearers PS I/B 384 generate a noise rise higher than 3 dB
(corresponding to 50% of UL Load). Beyond 75% load, the system is no longer stable, leading to significant
neighboring cell interference, cell coverage reduction and dropped calls.
The solution is to define a cost per UL RAB and a total UL capacity threshold. This cost can be tuned per UL PS
RB bit rate thanks to the ulCostForUlTokenCac parameter.
At each allocation, release, or reconfiguration of a UL resource, the UL load is incremented, decremented, or
adjusted in function of the source and target UL RAB costs.
This UL capacity pool is compared to a configurable threshold: if below this target, the call is accepted,
otherwise it is refused.
If a high bit rate UL PS RB is limited at RAB establishment because of this feature, it can be upgraded thanks to
UL RB Rate Adaptation feature if possible (see Packet Data Management section).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 64
NodeB hardware resources are usually dimensioned properly to process the achievable cell rate. However, there
are some scenarios where the bottleneck is not the NodeB available resources but the UL radio interference radio
induced by the traffic.
In this latter case, admitting new calls or reconfiguring some of the ongoing calls with higher rates will create
too much Multi Access Interference (MAI) and consequently decrease the Radio Links quality and Cell
Breathing.
It is better in this case to reject such an RL establishment.
The improvement of the CAC is achieved by taking into account the current UL Load. If it has reached a certain
value, no new RL is admitted.
Two thresholds are defined:
Max RTWP for total UL traffic (R’99+ E-DCH): totalRotMax
Max RTWP for non E-DCH traffic only used for R’99 CAC: rtwpMaxCellLoadNonEdch
The NodeB performs a very basic CAC without considering the cost of the link to be
established/reconfigured/released:
It compares the current UL load for non E-DCH calls to the rtwpMaxCellLoadNonEdch configurable threshold
parameter.
In case this UL load is lower or equal, it is admitted. Otherwise, it is rejected.
The non E-DCH UL load CAC threshold is configured in percentage (%).
As non E-DCH traffic is lower or equal to the total UL traffic (R’99 + E-DCH), the non E-DCH maxload should be
lower or equal to the total max load and the following parameter rule should be fulfilled:
rtwpMaxCellLoadNonEdch <= 1 – 1/10(totalRotMax/10)
rtwpMaxCellLoadCacActivation is used to activate the UL CAC on non-E-DCH traffic at BTS based on the RTWP.
rtwpMaxCellLoadNonEdch is used only if rtwpMaxCellLoadCacActivation is set to TRUE.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 65
Each Radio Bearer has a cost called Equivalent Bit Rate (EBR), which represents the amount of bandwidth to
reserve for the bearer, to guarantee acceptable QoS (delays, errors, etc.).
When the RNC performs resource reservation, it simultaneously covers resource allocation and admission control
(check if necessary resources are available).
First step of resource allocation aims at picking up an AAL2 connection and a CID according to the load balancing
and cid selection methods chosen.
A call admission control at ATM level is then performed by the RNC in order to prevent admission of AAL2
connections in excess of the available transport bandwidth.
This CAC applies to all AAL2 based interfaces: Iub, Iur, and IuCS.
Each time a new CID needs to be allocated, the AAL2 link CAC checks, according to the CAC method configured
(cacmethod parameter), whether the cost of the call (EBR) to be allocated fits in the remaining available
bandwidth. If it does not fit, the CID cannot be allocated.

AAL2 CAC can be performed at different level:


• AAL2 interface (cacmethod parameter set to Aal2If): AAL2 CAC is performed based upon the available
bandwidth of all AAL2 VCCs of a given interface.
• QoS (cacmethod parameter put to QoS): AAL2 CAC is performed based upon the available bandwidth of
groups of VCCs sharing the same quality of service. This method only applies to Iub and Iur, as there is only one
quality of service used on IuCS UP VCC.
• VCC (cacmethod parameter put to path, introduced in UA05.0. In this case, AAL2 CAC is performed based
upon the available bandwidth of a given VCC, so that the path cannot be overbooked.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 66
After having processed the RAB Matching and RAB Mapping algorithms, the RNC estimates the necessary
power to support initially the call. This power estimation (P res) corresponds to the power that will be reserved by
the RNC if the admission criterion is passed.
The reserved power P res is calculated differently depending on which algorithm is used to perform the downlink
power allocation:
algorithm 1: P res = pcpichPower + maxDlTxPowerPerOls - algo1DeltaTargetPower
algorithm 2: P res = + algo2DeltaTargetPower
Where: P ini = pcpichPower + initialDlEcnoTarget – CPICH_EC/NO
The choice between these two algorithms is done through the dlAlgoSelector parameter of the PowerConfClass
object:
Applying the dlAlgoSelector, the operator decides which algorithm to use in the different power control
configuration classes.
Each FDD cell points to a specific PowerConfClass, identified by powerConfId.
As the names indicate:
the object Class2CellReconfParams contains Class 2 parameters.
the object Class3CellReconfParams contains Class 3 parameters.
On RNC side, depending on the value of the parameter isCellReconfSupported (NodeB), the RNC knows
whether the NodeB supports the Cell Reconfiguration procedure or not.
if it does not, the Class 2 parameters are applied.
if the NodeB supports the Cell reconfiguration, the RNC takes the Class 3 parameters. When they are
changed online, the RNC sends the Cell Reconfiguration procedure.
On WMS (OMC) side:
If isCellReconfSupported is False, then the OMC maintains Class 2 and Class 3 parameters aligned: every
change on Class 3 parameters implies an update of Class 2 parameters and then a Cell lock/unlock.
If isCellReconfSupported is True, the Class 3 parameters are no more linked to Class 2 parameters and
may be changed on-line (without Cell lock/unlock)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 67
Once the downlink power Pres is assessed for the call, some admission criteria are checked by the RNC.
The admission criterion is the following:
Primary link admission (call establishment): P res + P used ≤ P traffic admission
Soft handover link addition: P res + P used ≤ P traffic
Note: P used is the sum of the P res of all calls being actually supported.
If this criterion is fulfilled, the power P res is reserved by the RNC. Otherwise, the call is rejected.
From UA5 release (E-DCH introduction):
P traffic = P MaxCell - P CCC * ActivityFactorCch - P OCNS - P edch - P minHsdpa
Where:
P MaxCell is the maximum total allowed DL power in the cell
P CCC is the total power allocated for all Common Control Channels in the cell
ActivityFactorCch is hard coded to 66%
P OCNS is the optional power allocated to OCNS if needed (can be pre-empted for R’99 traffic).
OCNS=Orthogonal Code Noise Simulator
P edch is the power reserved for DL transmission of E-AGCH and E-RGCH/E-HICH channels
(can be pre-empted for R’99 traffic)
P minHsdpa is the power reserved for a minimum HSDPA traffic in the cell

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 68
Tuning of RNC power pool occupancy
The parameter isBtsPowerSelfTuningActivated indicates if the power pool self-tuning must be performed or not.
If self-tuning is allowed, two cases must be considered:
Power consumption underestimated at the RNC: In this case, it is proposed to update the allocated power
(power consumed as seen by the RNC) based on the measured power (as measured by the NodeB) plus a
powerMargin.
Power consumption overestimated at the RNC: The power consumption is confirmed as overestimated if the
difference between the measured and allocated is above an overEstimate threshold. In that case, the new
allocated power (power consumed as seen by the RNC) is made equal to the measured power (as reported
by the NodeB).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 69
Power consumption underestimated at the RNC: In this case, it is proposed to update the allocated power (power
consumed as seen by the RNC) based on the measured power (as measured by the NodeB) plus a powerMargin.
Power consumption overestimated at the RNC: The power consumption is confirmed as overestimated if the
difference between the measured and allocated is above an overEstimate threshold. In that case, the new
allocated power (power consumed as seen by the RNC) is made equal to the measured power (as reported by
the NodeB).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 70
In this OVSF tree, some codes are reserved:
codes for common control channels
codes for OCNS
a sub-tree is allocated to the NodeB for HSDPA usage.
The rest of the OVSF tree is used by calls handled over R’99 resources.

For each allocation, the OVSF tree will be run from up to down (filling the gaps when any), which avoids to block
too many branches.

If a free code is found, the resource is granted to the call and the OVSF code CAC is successful, otherwise the
call is rejected and the CAC on OVSF code is declared failed.
The Dynamic DL Code Tree Management feature was introduced in UA05 in order to avoid R’99 code blocking.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 71
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 72
Each cell can only accept a limited number of simultaneous UEs in the Cell_FACH state:
Each mobile on Cell_FACH is allocated a token.
Each time a Cell_FACH admission is tried in a given cell, the current number of used tokens is compared to
a specific threshold. If below the threshold, the admission is successful and a token is allocated.
There are two thresholds used according to the reason for Cell_FACH admission. In the Alcatel-Lucent
implementation, they are defined as:
MaxNumberOfUserPerMacC (signaling dealing with Cell_FACH state as RRC Connection Request, Cell
Update – with at least one SRB allocated-) is used to limit the number of simultaneous user connections
being supported by a given Mac-C instance.
trbEstThreshold (transition from Cell_DCH state to Cell_FACH due to Always-on feature) defines the
maximum number of users that can have TRB configuration in Cell_FACH.
These parameters are set at the OAM in order to give a higher precedence to a new incoming call (RRC
connection request) than to a mobile already in call and aiming to transition from Cell_DCH to Cell_FACH.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 73
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.5 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 5 · Page 74
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 4
Page

1 Power management static settings 7


1.1 Downlink power settings 8
1.2 Cables losses without TMA 9
1.3 Cables losses with TMA 10
1.4 Common channel power settings 11
1.5 Dedicated channel power settings 12
2 PRACH Power Control 13
2.1 PRACH open loop 14
3 UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control 15
3.1 DPCCH open loop power control 16
3.2 UL gain factors 17
4 Outer loop power control 18
4.1 SIR target management 19
4.2 Partial SIR target update 20
4.3 OLPC based on Quality Estimator: QE 21
4.4 Accelerated SIR target convergence based on QE 23
5 UL inner loop power control 24
5.1 DPCCH inner loop power control 25
5.2 UL inner loop power control 26
5.3 UL power control algorithms 27
5.4 UL inner loop algorithm 1 28
5.5 UL inner loop algorithm 2 (no SHO case) 29
5.6 UL inner loop algorithm 2 (SHO case) 30
6 DL traffic channel power 31
6.1 Initial DL traffic channel power 32
6.2 DL DPCCH / DPDCH power offsets 33
6.3 DL power offset 2 as a function of the AS size 34
7 DL outer loop power control 35
7.1 DL outer loop power control 36
8 DL inner loop power control 37
8.1 DL inner loop algorithm 38
8.2 Power balancing 39
8.3 Rate reduction algorithm 40
9 Radio link control 41
9.1 UL dedicated channel synchronization 42
9.2 UL radio link failure – detected by UTRAN 43
9.3 DL radio link failure – detected by UE 44
9.4 DL RLC unrecoverable error – detected by UTRAN 45
9.5 UL RLC unrecoverable error – detected by UE 46
9.6 RRC connection re-establishment parameters 47
9.7 UL Radio Link Failure – RRC Connection Re-established 48
9.8 UL RLC unrecoverable error – RRC conn. re-established 49
9.9 RRC connection re-establishment - summary 50

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 7
At cell setup, the RNC calculates the max Tx Power, which is the maximum power that will be used to configure
the cell:
Max Tx Power (FDDCell) = min (Max Tx Power Required, Max DL Power capability)
At the Node B level, the power is owned by Power Amplifiers, which can be shared by multiple cells.
In Alcatel-Lucent configurations, cells on the same sector but on different carriers may share or not the same
Power Amplifier. This capability should allow optimization of the use of the PA. The sharing of power between
different cells associated with the same PA is static.
A configuration parameter at the OMC-B (called PaRatio) allows sharing of a PA power between two cells. From
an RNC perspective, the sharing is transparent.
Possible values of maxPowerAmplification are = {fullMode, max30W, max45W, max60W, max85W}
The Max PA Power, in dBm unit, represents the maximum output power of an MCPA board. If
maxPowerAmplification is set to the fullMode value then Max PA Power value depends on the HW type of the
MCPA board. For instance, it is equal to 46.5 dBm for a 45-W MCPA and to 47.8 dBm for a 60-W MCPA.
As the names indicate:
the class2CellReconfParams object contains Class 2 parameters.
the class3CellReconfParams object contains Class 3 parameters.
On RNC side, depending on the value of the isCellReconfSupported parameter (NodeB), the RNC knows if the
Node B supports the Cell Reconfiguration procedure or not:
If it does not, the Class 2 parameters are applied.
If the Node B supports the Cell reconfiguration, the RNC takes the Class 3 parameters. When they are
changed online, the RNC sends the Cell Reconfiguration procedure.
On OMC side:
If isCellReconfSupported is False, then the OMC maintains Class 2 and Class 3 parameters aligned: every
change on Class 3 parameters implies an update of Class 2 parameters and then a Cell lock/unlock.
If isCellReconfSupported is True, the Class 3 parameters are no more linked to Class 2 parameters and
may be changed on-line (without Cell lock/unlock).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 8
Computation of losses is not the same, depending on:
externalAttenuationMainDl and externalAttenuationDivDl parameters of the AntennaAccess object
TMA configuration
Cable losses without TMA.
If externalAttenuationXXXDl = 0, the transmission power reference point is defined at the antenna
connector of the BTS. In this case, the Global Losses refer only to internal cabling losses (typical value = 0.8
dB) and DDM insertion losses (typical value = 0.5 dB).
For OTSR configurations, additional losses must be taken into account:
Tx Splitter insertion losses (typical value = 0.3 dB)
Additional cabling between Tx Splitter and DDM (typical value = 0.3 dB)
If externalAttenuationXXXDl ≠ 0, the transmission power reference point is defined at the antenna
connector after the RF feeder (antenna side).
In this case, the reference point is the point so that losses between the BTS feeder connector (output of the
cabinet) and this point are equal to the data filled value of externalAttenuationXXXDl.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 9
When a TMA is specified (tmaAccessType = tmaUmtsOnly or tmaMix), the transmission power reference point
moves to the antenna port of the TMA. Additional losses are taken into account:
TMA insertion losses are equal to 0.3 dB in the transmission path.
jumper losses are set to 2*0.6 dB (0.6 dB for each jumper).
If externalAttenuationXXXDl is set to 0, the feeder losses are equal to 2 dB. Otherwise, the feeder losses are
equal to the data filled value of externalAttenuationXXXDl.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 10
In the slide, the Pilot power, that is, the P-CPICH power is defined by the pcpichPower parameter of the
FDDCell object as an absolute value in dBm, referenced at the BTS antenna connector.
All the other common channel powers are given relative to the P-CPICH level.
Because of the check in the BTS (CCM) at call setup, this relationship must be true for maxTxPower and
PcpichPower: PcpichPower > MaxTxPower - 15 dB.
A sensor at the output of the MCPA allows measurement of the effective output power of the amplifier. The range
of sensitivity of this sensor is [25 dBm … 46.5 dBm]. To detect surely power, it is recommended that the P-CPICH
Power (at PA Output) be higher than the minimum sensibility of this sensor).
PcpichPower > 25 dBm - total_losses_between_PA_output_and_reference_point
P-CPICH power is recommended to be set to:
35 dBm in case of one channel.
the half (32 dBm) if two carriers are supported by the same PA.

From UA05, when evaluating the power used by common channels, the RNC considers a certain activity factor
ActivityFactorCcch by which is multiplied the amount of power used by common channels as calculated prior to
UA05. It better reflects the actual common channel usage when calculating the Power Load Color of a cell and
the total power available for R’99 and HSDPA GBR traffic Ptraffic.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 11
A part of the Dedicated Channels power management relies on static settings.
This is for example the case in downlink for the maximum power per carrier and the upper and lower bounds of
the traffic channel. It is important to note that these last two parameters are not necessarily the same for all UEs
communicating in the cell, as different values are used depending on the radio bearer.

Static settings are also used to define the maximum allowed transmission power in UL per User Service. It
represents the total maximum output transmission power allowed for the UE and depends on the type of service
required. The information will be transmitted on the FACH, mapped on the S-CCPCH, to the UE in the RADIO
BEARER SETUP message of the RRC protocol.

Consequently, a new value may be decided by the RNC (Control Node) for the maxAllowedUlTxPower
parameter in the following cases:
a radio bearer is set up or reconfigured
a transport or a physical channel is reconfigured
an RRC connection is set up or re-established
the active set is updated, or
a handover is performed from GSM to UTRAN.

This parameter shall be re-transmitted to the UE

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 12
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 13
The PRACH consists of two parts:
A preamble part, which is sent by the UE; it is repeated until either an Acquisition Indicator (ACK or NACK) is
received over AICH, or the preamble retransmission counter reaches its max value (parameter provided by
the network). The first preamble is transmitted with a power of “Preamble initial power”. Each consecutive
preamble is transmitted with a power equal to the previous one plus a ‘power ramping step”. “Preamble initial
power” is calculated by the UE based on parameters sent on SIB 5 and SIB7 and on CPICH RSCP
measured by the UE. “power ramping step” is a UTRAN parameter sent to the UE over SIB 5.
A message part, which is sent after an acknowledged Acquisition indicator. This message part is composed
of a control part and a data part. The power of the control part is equal to the power of the last preamble sent
plus Pp-m, which is a UTRAN parameter sent over SIB5. The power of the data part is derived from the
power of the control part through (βc, βd) parameters per TFC also sent by the UTRAN over SIB5. βd/βc
defines the relative power between the control part and the data part.
Notes
RTWP: corrective term evaluating the average interference level on UL. In the Alcatel-Lucent
implementation, this is not a parameter. It corresponds to the UL RTWP measured by the Node B. It is
broadcast in SIB 7.
constantValue: corrective term to compensate for shadowing effects. It is broadcast in SIB 5.

powerOffsetPpM0 is the power offset between the last transmitted preamble and the control part of the message
for PRACH CTFC 0.
powerOffsetPpM1 is the power offset between the last transmitted preamble and the control part of the message
for PRACH CTFC 1.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 14
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 15
When establishing the first DPCCH, the initial power used by the UE to start the UL DPCCH transmission is:
DPCCH_Initial_power = dpcchPowerOffset – CPICH RSCP
It is provided by the RNC to the UE via RRC signaling (FACH / S-CCPCH), in the “Uplink power control info” IE or
in the “Uplink power control info short” IE.
These IEs are included (one or the other) in the RRC messages of the radio bearer setup, reconfiguration and
release, transport channel and physical channel reconfiguration, RRC connection setup and re-establishment and
in the handover to UTRAN command.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 16
The above figure illustrates the principle of the uplink spreading of DPDCH and DPCCH. The first step, the NRZ
modulation, consists in associating a real signal to each bit of these channels. The binary value “0” is mapped to
the real value +1 and the binary value “1” is mapped to the real value -1. Then, each channel is spread by an
OVSF code. As it was mentioned before, channelization codes are only used to spread the information in uplink
(not for channel multiplexing) because synchronization between UEs is too complex to achieve:
The channelization code used for DPCCH is always Cch,256,0 (all ones).
If only one DPDCH is used, it is spread by code Cch,SF,k, where k is linked to SF by k = SF/4. When more
than one DPDCH is used, they will all have an SF equal to 4.
βc for DPCCH and βd for DPDCH). These
After channelization, the spread signals are weighted by a gain factor (β
gain factors are quantized into 4 bits, giving values between 0 and 1. At least one of the values βc and βd is equal
to 1. These gain factors may vary for each TFC, and are either signaled or computed.
Then, the streams of chips are summed up, resulting in a multilevel signal. After this addition, the real-valued
chips on the I and Q branches are summed up and treated as a complex-valued stream of chips. This stream is
scrambled by a complex-valued scrambling code. For DPDCH and DPCCH, a unique scrambling code of 38,400
chips (corresponding to one radio frame) is used. That code can be either of long or short type.
Finally, the complex chips are I and Q multiplexed and sent over the air interface. The result of all this is a BPSK
modulation, which gives us 1 bit per symbol.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 17
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 18
The initial SIR target is sent by the RNC to the Node B through the initialSirTarget parameter. This parameter is
instantiated per RAB. Consequently, once the RNC has matched an RB onto the RAB requested by the Core
Network, it points to the initial SIR target value corresponding to this RB in the initialSirTarget parameter. This
value is transmitted to the Node B using NBAP signaling at each RADIO LINK SETUP or reconfiguration.
For each UlUserService, the list of radio bearers (UlRbSetConf) used in the multiple reference OLPC is given
through the referenceUlRbSetConfId parameter.
The outer loop power control algorithm takes into account all transport channels. For each transport channel, a
separate outer loop machine is run. Each outer loop machine updates its partial SIR target according to its
transport channel quality target (UlBlerTarget) as soon as it receives at least one transport block CRC. The
partial SIR target is then sent to the outer loop power control master.
The OLPC master determines the new SIR target as:
The maximum partial SIR target if at least one OLPC machine increases its partial SIR target.
The minimum partial SIR target if all OLPC machines reduce their partial SIR target.
Whenever the new SIR target is different from the old one, it is sent to the Node B.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 19
The RNC computes actualized partial SIR targets every TTI. The TTI value in milliseconds is given by the
transmitTimeInterval static parameter relative to the TrCHs used as references for the outer loop power control.
The reference TrCHs depends on the service type.
Each outer loop machine updates its partial UL SIR target according to its transport channel UL quality target
(BlerTarget) as soon as it receives at least one transport block CRC. An update from each OLPC machine to the
OLPC master is sent every update period or if the SIR target variation exceeds an upper limit
(updateThreshold).
The update period is defined by ulUpdatePeriod, and is provided in a number of TTIs.
When updating the SIR target at the Node B, the RNC sends on the user plane a specific control frame, called
Outer Loop Power Control, to the Node B. Consequently, for a given DPCCH, the period between two uplink SIR
target updates cannot be shorter than the shortest TTI of the DL associated transport channels.

In UA07.1, a new parameter (enablePeriodicSirTargetUpdate) was introduced to enable or disable the periodic
sending of Sir target when computed Sir Target is equal to the last value. This occurs when there is no traffic or at
the Sir target boundaries.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 20
The most important change is that the Bit Error Rate (Quality Estimator - QE) is taken into account.
This algorithm takes place only if the QE is bad.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 21
From UA07 onwards, an option is provided to use also the QE information for the calculation of the UL SIR target
value.
3GPP defines two kinds of Quality Estimates, which can be provided by the Node B to the RNC:
QE vs. TrCh BER is specified in 3GPP 25.133
QE vs. PhCh BER is specified in 3GPP 25.133
Quality Estimate is provided by the Node B in DCH FP UL frames. The type of QE depends on qeSelector IE in
NBAP Radio Link Setup/Reconfiguration messages:
qeSelector = 'Selected' means QE = transport channel BER.
qeSelector = ‘Non-Selected’ means QE = physical channel BER
In ALU UTRAN, QeSelector is set by the RNC as follows:
non-selected: AMR 2nd DCH sub-flow and AMR 3rd DCH sub-flow
selected: all other DCHs
Advantages:
QE is more accurate in average.
Provides a QE threshold above which we prevent the Sir to decrease even if CRC passed.
Potential drawbacks: QE can vary very instantaneously making difficult to set a unique threshold for a given
service.

N is the number of transport blocks in the TTI.


Nerr is the number of erroneous blocks in the TTI.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 22
The accelerated SIR Target convergence mechanism is based on a consecutive number of “good” frames and is
used to enable faster convergence when a certain number of consecutive “good” frames are received.

This mechanism is applicable at call setup/reconfiguration and during the call.

This mechanism aims to complement the existing Validity Condition algorithm also called Initial Convergence
algorithm, which applies at call setup only. When one mechanism is active, the other is not.

Advantages:

Faster convergence in good radio conditions


Reduced UL power, increased capacity

Potential drawbacks: underestimation of Sir can lead to BLER and SIR spikes and ping-pong in OLPC
adjustments

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 23
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 24
The Uplink Power Control is controlled by the Node B, which orders Power Control Commands (increase or
decrease) through TPC bits in DL DPCCH channels.
The UE then applies the PC command at the next UL DPCCH transmission.
DPDCH power is then adapted thanks to gain factors as seen previously.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 25
The uplink inner loop power control algorithm is located in the Node B physical layer. It is a fast procedure (up to
1500 Hz power change rate) used to derive power control commands (to be applied by the UE) from the SIR
target (set by the RNC) and UL measurements.
The Node B estimates the instantaneous SIR on the pilot bits received on the UL DPCCH and compares it to the
SIR target signaled by the RNC. In case the instantaneous SIR is lower (respectively higher) than the target SIR,
an up (respectively down) command is sent to the UE in the downlink DPCCH TPC field of each DPCCH radio
time slot:
up command: TPC = 1
down command: TPC = 0
In every slot, there is either an up or a down power control command: this process does not provide good stability
of the transmission power.

TPC commands are computed in each Node B independently from the others; if an UE is in Soft Handover with
several Node Bs, the TPC commands received from the different Node Bs may be conflicting. In the case of a
softer handover, the unique Node B involved sends the same TPC command on all the radio links of the same
radio link set.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 26
In the case of soft handover (where TPC commands come from different Node Bs), the UE has to combine
different TPCs in order to derive one single internal TPC_cmd (internal power control command applied to adjust
the UL transmission power).
There are two standardized algorithms (named: algorithm 1 and algorithm 2 in the 3GPP Specifications) for the
UE to process TPC commands.
The choice between these two algorithms is under the control of the RNC 1000, and is managed through the
powerCtrlAlgo parameter (manufacturer parameter).
It is UE specific in the sense that a specific message is sent to each UE in order to indicate which algorithm to
use, but Alcatel-Lucent sets the same value for all cells managed by an RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 27
This algorithm is well adapted for average speed UEs in urban or suburban environments. The principle of
algorithm 1 is that the UE adjusts its DPCCH transmission power every slot (frequency = 1500 Hz), according to
TPC_cmd (internal power control command applied to adjust the UE transmission power) derived from the TPC
commands received from all Node Bs involved in the communication.
We can distinguish three cases of TPC_cmd generation:
No macrodiversity: the UE receives a single TPC command in each slot (on the single radio link established
for the communication), from which it derives a TPC_cmd as follows:
if TPC command = 0, then TPC_cmd = -1
if TPC command = 1, then TPC_cmd = 1

Softer handover: in this case, the UE is aware (from TPC combination index parameter transmitted through
RRC protocol) that it will receive identical TPC commands in the downlink. The UE is then able to combine
these commands into a single TPC command. In the UE, the implementation is proprietary; for example, it
can use a maximum ratio combining with all TPC commands received in order to optimize the TPC
command decoding.

Soft handover: in this case, the TPC commands may be different. This case may even involve a softer
handover (from which a single TPC is derived, using for example MRC). The UE has first to use soft decision
in order to decode the different TPC commands transmitted. Then it has to combine them in order to deduce
a single TPC_cmd value. This TPC_cmd is equal to 1 only if all TPC received from other Node Bs are equal
to 1, otherwise, TPC_cmd is equal to -1.

Then, after deriving a unique TPC_cmd, the UE implements a power change based on the ulTpcStepSize
parameter of the UlInnerLoopConf object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 28
This algorithm is adapted to high- or low-speed environments (typically: dense urban or rural). With this algorithm,
the UE concatenates N TPC commands received on consecutive radio slots to derive a TPC_cmd to be applied
after the Nth slot. N can be different according to the handover situation, but it does always divide 15 (the
combining window of the TPC commands does not extend outside the frame boundary). Allowing a decision
every N = 5 radio slots instead of every slot, algorithm 2 is a way of emulating step sizes smaller than 1 dB
(typically: 0.2 dB or 0.4 dB, corresponding to the step sizes of 1 and 2 dB respectively, but applied every 5 TSs).
Note: In the TPC combination algorithm 2, the TPC_cmd is either 1, or –1, or 0.
Algorithm 2 works in the following way:
No macrodiversity: the UE concatenates commands received from 5 consecutive TSs to derive a TPC_cmd
value:
For the first 4 slots of a set, TPC_cmd = 0
For the fifth slot of a set, the UE uses hard decisions on each of the 5 received TPC commands as
follows:
if all 5 hard decisions within a set are 1, then TPC_cmd = 1
if all 5 hard decisions within a set are 0, then TPC_cmd = -1
otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0

Softer handover: similarly to algorithm 1, the UE soft-combines for each slot the TPC commands, known to
be the same (received from the same Node B).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 29
Soft handover: the derivation of the TPC_cmd from the TPC commands of the different radio links is done in the
following way:

First, the UE determines one temporary TPC command called TPC_tempi for each of the N sets of five TPC
commands. It is done as follows:

If all five hard decisions within a set = 1, TPC_tempi = 1.

If all five hard decisions within a set = 0, TPC_tempi = -1.

Otherwise, TPC_tempi = 0

Then the UE derives the combined TPC_cmd for the 5th slot as a function of all the N TPC_tempi:

TPC_cmd = 1 if (Sum of TPC_tempi)/N > 0.5

TPC_cmd = -1 if (Sum of TPC_tempi)/N < -0.5

Otherwise TPC_cmd = 0

Finally, after deriving a unique TPC_cmd, the UE implements a power change:

Uplink Power Change = TPC_cmd x ulTpcStepSize.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 30
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 31
When a traffic (dedicated) channel is set up, it is done at a certain downlink power called P ini defined by the
following equation:

P ini = pcpichPower + initialDlEcnoTarget – CPICH_Ec/No

Where pcpichPower is the downlink P-CPICH power, initialDlEcnoTarget depends on the service allocated to the
UE (access stratum configuration) and CPICH_EC/N0 is the EC/N0 of the Pilot received by the UE.
The P ini is used in the Call Admission Control downlink power reservation algorithm.

The downlink transmission power is limited by an upper and lower limit for each radio link. This limitation is set
through the maxDlTxPowerPerOls and minDlTxPower parameters (DlUsPowerConf object). Both parameters
actually provide a value for each access stratum configuration, so they correspond to a set of values rather than
to a single value. The value (in dB) of these parameters is provided with respect to P-CPICH power defined by
the pcpichPower parameter.

For SHO Leg Addition, the initial power is calculated once for all the new links to be added. P ini depends not only
on the CPICH Ec/No of the selected cell to be added, but also on all the CPICH Ec/No of the cells of the old
active set.
An equivalent CPICH Ec/N0 is calculated:

 N CPICH Ec /N0( celli)



CPICH _ Ec / N0 equiv
(dB) = 10 ∗ log ∑10 10 
 i=1 

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 32
The RNC can also configure static downlink physical channel parameters in the Node B. In the downlink, it is
possible to give power offsets to the pilot, TPC, and TFCI fields of the DPCCH relative to the DPDCH.

They are given at radio link setup in the Power Offset information IE:
PO 1: TFCI bits
PO 2: TPC bits
PO 3: pilot bits

In the Alcatel-Lucent implementation, the power offsets used to determine the transmission power of the TFCI,
TPC, and PILOT bits are defined by the po1ForTfciBits, po2ForTpcBits, and po3ForPilotBits parameters
respectively.

These parameters of the DlUserService object are transmitted in the Power_Offset_Information IEs of the
following NBAP signaling:
RADIO LINK SETUP,
RADIO LINK ADDITION, or
RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION.

They are identical for all TFCs in the TFCS.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 33
The DL Power Control Management provides an option to configure dynamically different PO 2 values depending
on the number of radio link sets (RLS) involved in the call.
The PO 2 value is variable depending on the number of RLs involved in the call.
The initial PO 2 is provided to the Node B in NBAP messages.
Then, at each new RL Setup/Addition/Deletion, the RNC shall support the transmission of the RADIO
INTERFACE PARAMETER UPDATE message over the Iub and Iur user plane interfaces, as per TS 25.427,
for the signaling of TPC PO updates.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 34
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 35
The DL outer loop power control algorithm is mobile-manufacturer specific, and DL power control outer loop is not
necessarily based on SIR (as UL outer loop is). The only information signaled to the UE by the RNC is a quality
target for each radio bearer, expressed as a BLER. This quality target is sent to the UE through RRC signaling
(DL Outer Loop Control procedure) for each transport channel of the connection. This quality target information is
mandatory for handover to UTRAN, radio bearer setup and transport channel reconfiguration messages. It is
optional for radio bearer reconfiguration and release, RRC connection setup, and re-establishment messages.

The DL outer loop power control algorithm is located in the UE. However, the RNC may further use the downlink
Outer Loop control procedure to control the DL outer loop algorithm in the UE. To prevent the UE from increasing
its DL BLER target value above its current value (the initial one, transmitted by the RNC via RRC signaling), the
RNC sets the “Downlink Outer Loop Control” IE to “increase not allowed”. This allows reducing the impact of the
UE proprietary outer loop algorithm on the system.

isDlReferenceTransportChannelAllowed indicates that the first Transport Channel of the RBsetConf may be
used as an Outer Loop Power Control Reference Transport Channel.

BlerTarget is used if isDlReferenceTransportChannelAllowed is TRUE. BlerTarget is the BLER DL quality


target, which must be met during Outer Loop Power Control. It is the Logarithm to the base 10 of the BLER.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 36
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 37
The DL inner loop power control algorithm is a fast procedure (1500 Hz) used to optimize DL transmission power
by sending power control commands to the Node B in the TPC field of UL DPCCH time slots.
At each TPC (Transmit Power Command = 0 or 1) field decoded (on UL DPCCH), the BTS estimates the
TPC_cmd (TPC command = -1 or 1) based on TPC and LimitedPowerIncrease values, and implements a DL
power change as shown in the above slide.
As the LimitedPowerIncrease functionality is not implemented, TPC_cmd values are directly deduced from TPC
values as following:
TPC = 0 => TPC_cmd = -1
TPC = 1 => TPC_cmd = 1
So TPC_cmd never has the value 0 (either decrease or increase command for the transmission power), as with
combination algorithm 2 for UL power control.
The downlink power adjustment (increment or decrement according to the power control command) step size is
tuned through the dlTpcStepSize parameter. This parameter is transmitted by the RNC to the Node Bs using the
TPC_DL_Step_Size IE contained in the RADIO LINK SETUP REQUEST message (NBAP). It cannot be
reconfigured during the connection. 3GPP TS allowed values are 0.5 dB, 1 dB (mandatory), 1.5 dB, and 2 dB.
Alcatel-Lucent implementation proposes only the two mandatory values: 0.5 dB and 1 dB.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 38
The objective of the downlink power balancing function is to equalize powers on the different radio links,
eliminating power-drifting effects.

This function is triggered by the SRNC, which provides balancing parameters to the Node Bs and executed by the
Node Bs.

The power balancing function brings a corrective factor P bal that is added to the power as calculated by the DL
inner loop power control.

This P bal is such that:

SP bal = (1 – R) (P ref + P pcpich – P init)

where:

SP bal is the sum of these corrective factors over an adjustment period corresponding to a
number of frames

P bal = 0 or -0.5 or 0.5 dB (in first implementation)

R is the adjustment ratio

P ref is the value of the DL Reference Power

P pcpich is the power used on the primary CPICH

P init is the power of the last slot of the previous adjustment period

Instead of specifying which maximum correction should be applied to one slot, a period is specified, as a number
of time slots, where the accumulated power adjustment should not be greater than 1 dB.

The above slide shows an example with SP bal = - 4 dB, adjustment period = 2 Radio Frames, max. adjustment
step = 5 Time Slots.
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 39
The RNC may activate a rate reduction algorithm. If rate reduction algorithm is applied, then the UE issues one
new command every 3 slots and repeats it over three slots, so the DL inner loop TPC commands frequency is
divided by 3 (1500 Hz down to 500 Hz).
This algorithm is controlled by the dpcMode parameter (DlInnerLoopConf object), which is signaled to the UE in
the Downlink DPCH Power Control Information IE using RRC signaling:
If dpcMode = singleTpc (0 on ASN.1 interface), then the UE sends a specific TPC command in each DPCCH
time slot (starts in the first available slot).
If dpcMode = tpcTripletInSoft (1 on ASN.1 interface), then the UE repeats the same TPC command over 3
successive DPCCH time slots.

On reception of the TPC field in the UL DPCCH, the Node B processes the command depending on the
DPC_MODE and calculates P TPC (k):

DPC_MODE = 0 => at each slot:

P TPC (k) = TPCDLStepSize if TPC = up

P TPC (k) = -TPCDLStepSize if TPC = down

DPC_MODE = 1 => each 3 slots:

P TPC (k) = TPCDLStepSize if 3 last TPCs are up

P TPC (k) = -TPCDLStepSize if 3 last TPCs are down

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 40
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 41
The uplink radio link sets are monitored by the Node B, to trigger radio link failure/restore procedures. Once the radio link sets
have been established, they will be in the in-sync or out-of-sync states.
When the radio link set is in the in-sync state, after receiving nOutSyncInd consecutive out-of-sync indications, the Node B
shall:
start timer tRlFailure;
upon receiving nInSyncInd successive "in sync" indications from Layer 1:
Stop and reset timer tRlFailure;
if tRlFailure expires:
The Node B shall trigger the RL Failure procedure and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync. When the RL
Failure procedure is triggered, the state of the radio link set will change to the out-of-sync state.
The RNC receiving a Radio Link Failure Indication message from the Node B will trigger the call release (call
drop radio in this case) if no radio link remains in "in sync" state.
When the radio link set is in the out-of-sync state, after receiving nInSyncInd successive in-sync indications Node B shall
trigger the RL Restore procedure and indicate which radio link set has re-established synchronization. When the RL Restore
procedure is triggered, the state of the radio link set will change to the in-sync state.
Similar Radio Link Control is implemented in DL in the UE thanks to UeTimerCstConnectedMode object parameters:
n315 UE constant is analog to nInSyncInd
n313 UE constant is analog to nOutSyncInd
t313 UE timer is analog to tRlFailure
Activation Rules:
(nOutSyncInd * 10) + tRlFailure < (n313 * 10) + t313 + PA off
t315 > rrcReestPSMaxAllowedTimer

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 42
A call drop is triggered as soon as the loss of the last RL is detected by the RNC.
isPsRrcReestablishAllowed (resp. isCSRrcReestablishAllowed) is the parameter used to activate or de-
activate the RRC Connection Re-establishment feature for CS (resp. PS).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 43
A call drop is triggered as soon as the loss of the last RL is detected by the RNC.
Note: t314 must be set equal to a non-zero value so that the UE performs a Cell Update procedure.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 44
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 45
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 46
rrcReestablishPSThreshold (resp. rrcReestablishCSThreshold) is the CPICH_Ec/No (CpichEcNo) threshold
above which an RRC Connection Re-establishment for a CS (resp. PS) call can take place at the reception of the
Cell Update message coming from the UE.
rrcReestPSMaxAllowedTimer (resp. rrcReestCSMaxAllowedTimer) is the timer started by the RNC when it
detects a UL Radio link Failure or a DL RLC Unrecoverable error on a CS (resp. PS) call.
Afterwards, either the RNC stops this timer after having received a Cell Update message from the UE, or it
triggers a call drop if this timer expires (no cell update received from the UE).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 47
A similar scenario can occur in case the UE detects a DL Radio Link Failure: the RNC receives a Cell Update
from the UE without expecting it.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 48
This scenario applies only for (CS + PS) calls case because there is no TRB established in RLC ACK mode for
CS calls but TM mode is used. For CS call case, the RLC unrecoverable error can occur on SRB only, leading to
a call drop.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 49
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 50
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.6 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 6 · Page 51
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 4
Page

1 Call management overview 7


1.1 Call management mechanisms 8
2 Always on 9
2.1 Always on downsize principles 10
2.2 Always on upsize principles 11
2.3 Always on downsize parameters 12
2.4 AO upsize UL parameters (FACH to DCH) 13
2.5 AO upsize DL parameters (FACH to DCH) 14
2.6 AO upsize Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH transition 15
2.7 One-shot Ec/No report 16
2.8 RRC states transitions 17
2.8.1 URA_PCH transitions if CELL_PCH is used 18
2.8.2 URA_PCH transitions if CELL_PCH is not used 19
2.8.3 CELL_PCH transitions 20
2.8.4 Direct transition from Cell/URA_PCH to DCH 21
2.8.5 URA update in URA_PCH state 26
2.8.6 Cell update in CELL_PCH state 27
2.8.7 Cell update in Cell_FACH state 28
2.8.8 Cell reselection during Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH 29
2.9 PCH states configuration 30
2.10 AO step 2 and AO step 3 timers 31
2.11 Definition of isAlwaysOnAllowed (xxRBsetConf) 32
2.12 Exercise: find the parameter values 33
2.13 Mono-service PS/multi-RAB PS I/B R’99 (R’99 PS Mux) 34
2.14 Multi-service CS + PS 35
2.15 Recovery actions Cell_FACH admission failure 36
2.16 UTRAN Registration Area (URA) 37
2.17 User services parameters 38
2.18 Exercise: find the RRC states transitions 39
3 RB rate adaptation 41
3.1 RB rate adaptation principles 42
3.2 Traffic monitoring: UL & DL throughput 43
3.3 DL downsizing 44
3.4 UL downsizing 45
3.5 DL multi-stage upsizing 46
3.6 UL step by step upsizing 47
3.7 UL upsizing based on UE Buffer Occupancy (BO) 48
3.7.1 Event4A processing without UE Tx power info 49
3.7.2 Event4A processing with UE Tx power info 50
3.8 DL upsizing based on RNC Buffer Occupancy 51
3.8.1 Internal RNC event processing 52
3.9 Ping-pong timers 53
3.10 RAN model 54
3.11 Exercise 55
4 iRM scheduling 56
4.1 iRM scheduling principles 57
4.2 Event A for iRM scheduling downgrade 58
4.3 Events B1 and B2 for iRM scheduling upgrade 59
4.4 iRM scheduling upgrade 60
4.5 PS streaming RAB: iRM scheduling 61
4.6 iRM scheduling parameters for downgrade 62
4.7 iRM scheduling parameters for upgrade 63
4.8 Special case: switching between video & voice 64
4.8.1 Triggering VT downgrade 65
4.8.2 Triggering speech upgrade 66

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 5
Page

4.8.3 RAN parameters 67


4.8.4 RAN parameters – neighboring RNC 68
4.8.5 Activation parameters 69
5 iRM preemption 70
5.1 iRM preemption algorithm 71
5.2 Cell color/active set color calculation 72
5.3 iRM preemption: UE to preempt? 73
5.4 iRM preemption behavior 74
6 Preemption process for DCH and HSDPA/HSUPA 75
6.1 Concepts 76
6.2 Eligible procedures 77
6.3 Eligible CAC failure cases 78
6.4 Internal or external CAC failures 79
6.5 Eligible transport channel 80
6.6 Eligible services 81
6.7 Selection of service to be pre-empted 82
6.8 Mono-step / multi-step pre-emption 83
6.9 Selection of service to be downgraded 84
6.10 Estimation of resource de-allocation 85
6.11 Queuing of RAB assignment request 86
6.12 Exercise 1: RAB assignment queuing and pre-emption 87
6.13 Exercise 2: estimation of resource de-allocation 88
7 AMR rate change during the call 89
7.1 General principles 90
7.2 Iub DS load criteria 92
7.3 UL cell load criteria 93
7.4 DL power load criteria 94
7.5 DL Tx CP criteria 95
7.6 Parameters settings 97
8 PS CN requested RAB modification 101
8.1 PS CN requested RAB modification 102
8.2 RAB modification in a non-Iur scenario with SRLR 103
8.3 RAB modification in a non-Iur scenario without SRLR 105

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 7
Call Management is a set of reactive mechanisms performed during the call in order to improve the system
capacity, by adapting the resources used by the users to different situation (traffic activity, real traffic, RF
conditions, etc.):

Always On: Downsize and upsize of user resources are performed, depending on user traffic activity in DL
and UL (two-step mechanism, depending on whether there is low traffic or no traffic at all).
RB Rate Adaptation: Downsize and upsize of user resources are performed depending on user real time
traffic and buffer occupancy in DL and UL.
iRM Scheduling: Downsize and upsize of user resources are performed depending on user radio conditions
in DL.
iRM Preemption: User resources are downsized, depending on cell load and user priority in DL.
Preemption: User resources are downsized depending on CAC failure and call priority in DL and UL. If
downsize is not sufficient to free resources, some calls can be release (low priority users).
AMR Rate Change: Downsize and upsize of user resources (codec) are performed depending on radio
conditions (UL interference, DL power) and Node B resources (Baseband, Iub) in DL and UL.

Most of these Call Management features operate only on UMTS PS I/B RABs, because there is no Guaranteed
Bit Rate defined for such traffic classes. However, iRM Scheduling is also available for PS Streaming services to
avoid call drops when UE moves in poor radio quality areas. Preemption process applies to any types of call
whereas AMR rate change applies to Multi-Mode AMR calls only.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 8
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 9
Dedicated radio resources are not optimal to support packet services with sporadic traffic. In order to find the best
trade-off between efficient resource usage and subscriber comfort, the Always-on concept developed is
composed of three steps.
After a first period of low activity (T1), the bearer is reconfigured to a predefined downsized bearer configuration,
which consumes less radio resources.
If traffic activity is detected, the bearer is upgraded back to its initial configuration (or to a degraded one if network
congestion is meanwhile detected).
If no traffic activity is detected during a second period of time (T2), then the radio bearer is released but the RRC
connection remains as well as the Iu Connection in order to speed up the needed radio bearer setup in case or
user traffic resumption.
If neither traffic nor signaling activity is observed during a third period of time (T3), then the RRC and Iu
connection are released but the following context info remains between UE and Network:
the PDP context at the SGSN
the PPP (or IP) link between UE and ISP
the SGSN-GGSN tunnel
When downsize criteria is met, the Always-on downsized RB (FACH) is determined at the OAM, thanks to
the following parameters:
DL downsized RB: alwaysOnDlRbSetFachId (AlwaysOnConf object)
UL downsized RB: alwaysOnUlRbSetFachId (AlwaysOnConf object)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 10
In Cell_PCH or URA_PCH states, although the connection is no more active, the mobile keeps its PDP context
active.
Therefore, a traffic resume is done either:
By the mobile: it re-establishes a connection to the network.
Alternatively, by the network: it pages the mobile, creating a new connection. The dataflow is the same as
the mobile initiated resume except for the paging phase.
In Cell_FACH state, the RNC assess the user data throughput and decides to perform an AO upsize to DCH
radio bearer if the high user throughput is detected.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 11
The AO downsize step 1 condition is based on DL and UL traffic volume monitoring on non-sliding time windows.
The downsize criterion is met if:
(TBsize x NbTB) / Step1AverageWindow < Step1DlUlThresholdThroughput
during at least TimerT1.
With:
NbTB: Number of Transport Blocks transferred during the time window
TBsize: size of a L1 Transport Block (in bits)
AO Downsize is performed when UL and DL criteria are met.
The AO downsize step2 decision is based on DL and UL traffic volume monitoring on non-sliding time windows.
The release criterion is met if:
(TBsize x NbTB) / Step2AverageWindow < Step2ThresholdThroughput
at least during TimerT2 seconds
The UE may keep or not its RRC connection or not depending on the usage of the Cell_PCH/URA_PCH states or
not.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 12
AO Upsize is performed when either UL or DL criteria are met.
Because the upsize conditions are applied when the mobile is using common UL and DL resources
(RACH/FACH), these conditions cannot be based on observed user traffic. The principle is that these conditions
are based on RLC buffer occupancy, reflecting the state of congestion of the transport channel (see following two
slides).

The UL upsize condition relies on event triggered UE traffic volume measurement on RACH Transport Channel,
based on event 4A.
As the sum of Buffer Occupancies of RBs multiplexed onto the RACH exceeds a certain threshold
(RepThreshold), the mobile performs an event triggered reporting.
On reception of this event, the SRNC considers the UL upsize condition as fulfilled.
The pendTimeAfterTrig timer is started in the UE when a measurement report has been triggered by a given
event. The UE is then forbidden to send new measurement reports triggered by the same event during this
period. Instead, the UE waits until the timer has expired.
The timeToTrigger timer is started in the UE when the Transport Channel Traffic Volume triggers the event.
If the TCTV crosses the threshold before the timer expires, the timer is stopped. If the timer expires then a
report is triggered.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 13
The DL upsize condition relies on the same kind of mechanism. As the sum of Buffer Occupancies of RBs
multiplexed onto the FACH exceeds a certain threshold for a given UE, the SRNC considered the DL upsize
condition as fulfilled.
The parameter Step1TimerBetween2Reports is used to avoid sending unnecessary “upsize required” event
reports during the execution of the upsize procedure. This parameter sets the minimum time between the
emissions of two events "upsize required" by the RNC-IN.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 14
From UA7 onwards, the AO success rate during the Cell_FACH to DCH can be improved by repeating the
message RB Reconfiguration:
reconfigTimeFachDch: defines the timer for retransmission of reconfiguration messages in Cell FACH due
to response message timeout for Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH transition.
reconfigRetriesFachDch: defines the maximum number of reconfiguration message retries to transmit for
Cell FACH to Cell_DCH transition.

The data rates allocated in the AO upsize procedure is limited:


If the isOamCappingOfDataAllowed flag is set to False then the maxUlEstablishmentRbRate and
maxDlEstablishmentRbRate parameters limit the data rates.
If the flag is set to "True“, another set of parameters is used, depending on the procedure where the trigger is
created and on the link, that triggers the transition (DL or UL).

The rate limitation is applied only on a DCH transport channel for initial state and can be modified later by other
algorithms like RRA.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 15
The objective of this feature is to improve the mobility management of the UE once it arrives to DCH state for idle
state - RRC Establishment, FACH to DCH Transition and PCH to DCH Transition. The focus is on FACH to DCH
transition.
From UA7 onwards, if isSib11IntraFreqOneShotAllowed is set to "True", then the info to be included on SIB 11
is the OneShot periodic measurement. This info replaces the normal events 1A, 1B, or 1C by the Intra-Frequency
One-shot measurement.
Once the UE has this information thru SIB11, it can send Measurement reports in a very early stage (before call
management is ready to process it); in this case, the event will be stored and processed as soon as possible by
Call management.
On reception of a One-Shot report following a transition from Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH, the RNC will update the
iRM RL color based on CPICH Ec/N0 measurements and determine whether to trigger SHO on the neighbor cells
based on a configurable threshold softHoAddThresholdOneShot.
For UEs that do not support the measurement configuration via the SIB11, the RNC can send an RRC
Measurement Control message with the following settings; periodic, the Reporting Quantity EC/Io with Amount of
Reporting set to 1. This is done if the isIntraFreqOneShotDchAllowed parameter is set to "True".
The One-shot Ec/Io report has the same meas. Id as the inter-RAT (id=03), this is not problematic since the
intrafrequency One-shot report has an amount of reporting =1, and it will be sent in an early stage of the call
when normally there is no 2D event configured.
Once the 2D event is triggered, another Measurement control is sent. It uses with the same id but overwrites the
intrafrequency settings of “One-shot” with new inter-RAT IE.
(isSib11IntraFreqOneShotDchAllowed)
isSib11IntraFreqOneShotAllowed is an RNC flag. This flag exists per FDDCell from UA07.1 on and
corresponds to the isSib11IntraFreqOneShotAllowedPerCell parameter.
(isSib11IntraFreqOneShotDchAllowedPerCell)
In UA07.0, a workaround was defined later in order to allow the activation of One-shot per cell. The
reserved0.FddCell parameter controls this feature at cell level.
Note: The OneShot Measurement is only valid for Cell Reselection without HCS.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 16
As explained in TS 25.331, "The RRC states within UTRA RRC Connected Mode reflect the level of UE
connection and which transport channels that can be used by the UE."
When the RNC receives a RAB assignment request, the corresponding Radio Bearer is by default allocated
in CELL_DCH.
Then, later on during the call, a UE can be moved between CELL_DCH and Cell_FACH based on user
activity (i.e. user traffic volume monitoring), that can be controlled by the operator thanks to inactivity timers.
Since Cell_FACH makes use of RACH and FACH, which are common transport channels (shared between all the
users of the cell), Cell_FACH is only suited to non real-time data services (i.e. Interactive or Background) and can
even be used to transmit small amounts of user data. However, it cannot be used for real-time traffic like voice or
video telephony; the latter services can only supported in CELL_DCH.
Always-on is the Alcatel-Lucent PS call management feature responsible for choosing the best radio resources
according to the amount of traffic the subscriber has to transmit.
From UA05.0, the Always-on mechanism supports these two RRC states: URA_PCH and CELL_PCH.
PCH states (i.e. CELL_PCH and URA_PCH) are useful for data subscribers who can fallback to one of these
states when they are completely inactive:
Since no cell resources are allocated to UEs in these states, i.e. no dedicated physical channel are allocated
to those UEs, they have no impact on the cell capacity.
Nevertheless, subscribers benefit from a quicker re-establishment time compared to when in idle mode and
the UE battery consumption is low, i.e. equivalent to when the UE is in idle mode.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 17
When CELL_PCH is used, the transitions between URA_PCH and the other states are the following:
Transition from CELL_PCH to URA_PCH:
When in CELL_PCH, the transition to URA_PCH occurs when the user has performed a minimum
number of CELL UPDATE procedures. Therefore, this transition is based on the Cell Update signaling
load and not on the user traffic activity. Hence, this transition is not directly related to AO.
nbOfCellUpdatesFromCellPchToUraPch is used to control the transition from CELL_PCH to
URA_PCH state in case the both are activated. It represents the threshold value for the number of cell
update procedures (with cause “Cell reselection”) initiated by the UE in CELL_PCH state (for a
maximum duration of CellPchToIdleTimer) for the RNC to trigger a state change to URA_PCH for
this UE.
Transition from URA_PCH to Cell_FACH:
In case some data need to be transmitted, the UE is transferred to Cell_FACH:
In uplink, access is performed by RACH.
In downlink, UTRAN sends a paging request message (PAGING TYPE1).
Transition from URA_PCH to idle through Cell_FACH:
Once in URA_PCH, if the subscriber is completely inactive, i.e. no traffic during a certain period
(UraPchToIdleTimer), then the UE is further moved to idle mode.
Transition to Cell_FACH is required to perform the RRC signaling connection release.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 18
When CELL_PCH is not used, the transitions between URA_PCH and the other states are the following:
Transition from Cell_FACH to URA_PCH:
When in Cell_FACH, the amount of user traffic is monitored in both uplink and downlink directions.
When there is no traffic during a certain period of time (FachToUraPchTimer) and CELL_PCH is not
enabled, the UE is moved to URA_PCH.
The transition criteria are the same as those used for transition to idle mode, i.e. traffic volume
measurement on DTCH in both uplink and downlink directions.
Similar to the transition from Cell_FACH to DCH the AO success rate can be improved from UA07
onwards by repeating the message RB Reconfiguration:
reconfigRetriesFachPch: defines the maximum number of retransmissions of RB
Reconfiguration message due to response message timeout.
reconfigTimeFachPch: defines the timer for retransmission of the RB Reconfiguration
messages.

Transition from URA_PCH to Cell_FACH:


In case some data need to be transmitted, the UE is transferred to Cell_FACH:
In uplink, access is performed by RACH.
In downlink, UTRAN sends a paging request message (PAGING TYPE1).

Transition from URA_PCH to idle through Cell_FACH:


Once in URA_PCH, if the subscriber is completely inactive, i.e. no traffic during a certain period
(UraPchToIdleTimer), then the UE is further moved to idle mode.
Transition to Cell_FACH is required to perform the RRC signaling connection release.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 19
The transitions between CELL_PCH and the other states are the following:
Transition from Cell_FACH to CELL_PCH:
When in Cell_FACH, the amount of user traffic is monitored in both uplink and downlink directions.
When there is no traffic during a certain period of time (FachToCellPchTimer), the UE is moved to CELL_PCH.
The transition criteria are the same as those used for transition to idle mode, i.e. traffic volume measurement on
DTCH in both uplink and downlink directions.
Like for the transition from Cell_FACH to URA_PCH the AO success rate can be improved from UA7 onwards by
repeating the message RB Reconfiguration using reconfigRetriesFachPch and reconfigTimeFachPch
parameters.
Transition from CELL_PCH to URA_PCH through Cell_FACH (if URA_PCH state is used):
Once a UE is in CELL_PCH, and if URA_PCH is enabled, the RNC increments a counter that counts the number
of cell updates.
When the number of cell updates has exceeded a certain limit (nbOfCellUpdatesFromCellPchToUraPch), the
RNC moves the UE from CELL_PCH to URA_PCH.
Transition to Cell_FACH is required to perform the transition signaling.
Transition from CELL_PCH to Cell_FACH: In case some data need to be transmitted, the UE is transferred to
Cell_FACH:
In uplink, access is performed by RACH.
In downlink, UTRAN sends a paging request message (PAGING TYPE1).
Transition from CELL_PCH to idle mode, through Cell_FACH:
Once in CELL_PCH, if the subscriber is completely inactive, i.e. no traffic during a certain period
(CellPchToIdleTimer), then the UE is further moved to idle mode.
Transition to Cell_FACH is required to perform the release signaling.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 20
Without direct transition from Cell/URA_PCH to DCH, direct RRC state transition from URA_PCH or CELL_PCH
to CELL_DCH is supported only for multi-RAB call or upon a mobile terminating CS RAB request.

This feature extends the direct transition support to all RAB combinations and to all Always-on upsize triggers.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 21
The decision to go directly to CELL_DCH or through Cell_FACH is based on the Establishment Cause and/or the
Traffic Volume Indicator (TVI) included in the Cell Update message.

This feature is an enhancement of the AO, base feature RRC and Always-on STATES MANAGEMENT. The
“RRC and Always-on STATES MANAGEMENT” is in charge of monitoring the radio resources allocated to a UE
about the actual traffic activity of the user.

FEATURE BENEFITS
Direct transition from PCH to DCH improves the user perceived latency when traffic resumes from CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH. The transition delay versus the two-step transition is reduced from approximately 900 to 550 ms.
A direct transition from PCH to DCH involves a lower number of exchanged signaling messages between the UE
and the RNC versus a two-step transition. Thus, the signaling load of the RNC control plane can be reduced.
Direct transition can avoid the intermediate step in Cell_FACH and thus reduces the number of users in
Cell_FACH state.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 22
In 3GPP 25.331 Rel.5, the Establishment Cause has been added to the CELL UPDATE message. This can be
used by the RNC to determine the target RRC state, i. e. in case of Originating Conversational Call, the RNC can
move the UE to CELL_DCH directly (in the current solution, the call setup is done on Cell_FACH for PS I/B)
and therefore improves the call establishment success rate.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 23
In 3GPP TS 25.331 Rel-6, the Cell Update message can contain an optional IE with a TVI. This IE is set to "True"
when the amount of data in the UE buffer is above a configured threshold, while the absence of this IE means the
amount of data is lower. This can be used by the RNC to decide between CELL_DCH and Cell_FACH when
traffic resumes on a PS RAB. When the RNC receives a Cell Update message with TVI set to "True" then it
moves the UE to CELL_DCH directly.

The Traffic Volume Indicator is set to "True" when the criteria for event based traffic volume measurement
reporting is fulfilled, while the absence of this IE means the criterion is not fulfilled.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 24
The second sub-feature provides configuration capability that permits operators to activate/deactivate the Always
On feature for UE having Interactive RAB, with the Signaling Indication (SI) set to ‘signaling’. The operator will
also be able to set different AO timers value for PS Interactive Signaling RAB by setting a desired value for the
configurable parameter.
In the existing implementation, the Always-on feature is by default disabled if SI=”signaling”. The Signaling
Indication is set to “signaling” by the PS Core network to inform the UTRAN that a RAB carries high layer
signaling (IMS signaling, VoIP signaling, etc). Hereupon, the Interactive RAB with SI=”signaling” is supposed to
carry signaling used by end-party entities to setup/release for example the streaming bearer, the initial thought
that allowing AO on such a RAB could introduce latency in the streaming session setup.
However, recent feedbacks from different customers stated that on the other hand keeping all SI=”signaling” RAB
in CELL_DCH is a waste of resources. For streaming, it may be pertinent not to trigger transition to Cell_FACH.
However, for many other IMS based applications or for proprietary applications using the Signaling Indicator,
keeping the UE in CELL_DCH would result in an expensive dimensioning for Node B baseband resources
(number of CEs, HSPA connections).

The AO timers for PS Interactive Signaling RAB will be set according to the regular AO timer multiplied by
"psSigAoTimerCoeff".

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 25
Admission control
Although no cell resources are allocated to a UE in URA_PCH, the RNC has to maintain the RRC and Iu
connections, to keep a UE context as well as to process the URA Update procedure.
Therefore, the RNC controls the maximum number of simultaneous UEs in URA_PCH and once the limit is
reached, a UE is moved to idle mode instead.
Mobility
In URA_PCH state, the location of a UE is known at UTRAN Registration Area (URA) level.
A URA is an area covered by a number of cell(s), which is only known by the UTRAN.
The UE performs a Cell Reselection and upon selecting a new UTRA cell belonging to a URA that does not
match the URA used by the UE, the UE moves to Cell_FACH state and initiates a URA Update towards the
network.
After the URA Update procedure has been performed, the UE state is changed back to URA_PCH if neither the
UE nor the network has any more data to transmit.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 26
Admission control
Although no cell resources are allocated to a UE in CELL_PCH, the RNC has to maintain the RRC and Iu
connections, to keep a UE context as well as to process the Cell Update procedure.
Therefore, the RNC controls the maximum number of simultaneous UEs in CELL_PCH; once the limit is reached,
a UE is moved to idle mode instead.
Mobility
In CELL_PCH state, the location of a UE is known at UTRA cell level.
The UE performs Cell Reselection and upon selecting a new UTRA cell, it moves to Cell_FACH state and initiates
a Cell Update procedure in the new cell.
After the Cell Update procedure has been performed, the UE state is changed back to CELL_PCH if neither the
UE nor the network has any more data to transmit.
Mobility over Iur
If as a result of the Cell Reselection process, a UE initiates a CELL UPDATE message in a cell being controlled
by an RNC (CRNC) different from the SRNC, then an Alcatel-Lucent CRNC releases the RRC connection, i.e.
RRC CONNECTION RELEASE is sent with cause Directed Signaling Connection Re-establishment. The UE will
then re-establish the RRC connection under the new RNC, what should be transparent to the subscriber since it
was inactive.
The same procedure applies if an Alcatel-lucent SRNC receives a Cell Update message from a UE that has re-
selected a cell controlled by another RNC vendor.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 27
Mobility
In Cell_FACH state, the location of a UE is known at cell level.
The UE performs Cell Reselection and upon selecting a new cell, it initiates a Cell Update procedure in the new
cell and stays in Cell_FACH state.
Mobility over Iur
If as a result of the Cell Reselection process, a UE initiates a CELL UPDATE message in a cell being controlled
by an RNC (CRNC) different from the SRNC, then an Alcatel-Lucent CRNC releases the RRC connection, i.e.
RRC CONNECTION RELEASE is sent with cause Directed Signaling Connection Re-establishment. The UE will
then re-establish the RRC connection under the new RNC, what should be transparent to the subscriber since it
was inactive.
The same procedure applies if an Alcatel-lucent SRNC receives a Cell Update message from a UE that has re-
selected a cell controlled by another RNC vendor.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 28
From UA07, onwards isFachToDchEnhancementAllowed determines whether handling of cell reselection
during FACH to DCH transition is supported.

This scenario occurs during a transition of a PS RAB from Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH where the RNC has
submitted an RRC RB Setup or RRC RB Reconfiguration message to the UE and an RRC Cell Update message
(Cell update cause = “cell reselection“ or “re-entered service area“) interrupts the transition.

To successfully transition the UE to Cell_DCH on the newly selected cell, the RNC will roll back the operations on
the old cell and attempt anew the transition to Cell_DCH on the new cell.

If the Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH transition is initiated on a cell with poor radio conditions, and at a certain time the
UE is no more reachable, and it manages to reach back to the network thru a Cell-Update message with cause
“cell reselection” or “re-entered service area”, the RNC will:
Give Cell update message priority over the ongoing Reconfiguration from FACH to DCH.
Cancel any changes ongoing for resources to previous cell
Continue with the transition from FACH to DCH on the new cell using the same triggering information on the
initial attempt.
This procedure is only attempted once, if the cell update fails, then all resources on new and old cell are released

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 29
Four AO Downsized configurations can be used thanks to the pchRrcStates parameter:
Cell_FACH only
Cell_FACH or CELL_PCH
Cell_FACH or URA_PCH
Cell_FACH or CELL_PCH or URA_PCH

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 30
AO Downsize are split into the following steps:
AO Downsize Step 1:
from CELL_DCH to Cell_FACH
AO Downsize Step 2:
from Cell_FACH to CELL_PCH if CELL_PCH state is used
from Cell_FACH to URA_PCH if URA_PCH state is used and CELL_PCH state is not used
AO Downsize Step 3:
from CELL_DCH to PMM-idle if AO is enabled but Downsized mode is not used
from Cell_FACH to PMM-idle if PCH states are not used
from CELL_PCH to PMM-idle if CELL_PCH state is used
from URA_PCH to PMM-idle if URA_PCH state is used

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 31
The isAlwaysOnAllowed parameter in DlRbSetConf and UlRbSetConf determines the behavior of each Radio
Bearer when the Always-on downsize is triggered. It can take the following values:
Degraded2AlwaysOnOnly means that the downsize is allowed; its target radio bearer is the one, determined
either by the parameters AlwaysOnDlRbSetDchId / AlwaysOnUlRbSetDchId in case of downsize in cell DCH
State, or AlwaysOnDlRbSetFachId / AlwaysOnUlRbSetFachId in case of downsize in cell FACH State.
ReleaseOnly means that there is no intermediate downsize for this Radio Bearer. The Radio Bearer is
released when the release conditions are fulfilled.
Disabled means that the Always-on feature is disabled for this Radio Bearer.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 32
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 33
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 34
CS + PS I/B 0/0(+PS I/B 0/0) for Always-on on Mono-RAB
UA05.0 / UA05.1: when a user has a RAB CS + PS I/B calls established, the RNC manages user inactivity
in the following way :
Always-on Step 1 (low activity) : reconfiguration to CS + PS I/B 8/8
Always-on Step 2 (inactivity) : the PS RAB is released – CS + PS I/B 8/8 -> CS
UA06.0: new step for CS + PS
Always-on Step 1 : unchanged
Always-on Step 2 : reconfiguration to CS + PS I/B 0/0
1. allows a quicker re-establishment in case PS traffic resumes.
2. CS + PS I/B + PS I/B combinations are handled the same way with a reconfiguration to CS +
PS I/B 0/0 + PS I/B 0/0.
3. The RNC monitors the traffic on the PS RB(s) and can trigger an upsizing while the CS call is
active.
o As part of this evolution:
1. when a UE is in URA_PCH or CELL_PCH and the RNC receives a request to
establish a CS RAB, the user is allocated a CS + PS I/B 0/0 RB or CS + PS I/B 0/0 +
PS I/B 0/0 depending on the number of PS RAB established. From a resources usage
point of view, this is more efficient than CS + PS I/B 8/8 or CS + PS I/B 64/64 + PS I/B
64/64, which are allocated with the current implementation.
2. When the CS call is released and if the PS traffic is still 0/0, then the UE is moved
back to URA_PCH or CELL_PCH.
Establishment Cause and Traffic Volume Indicator (TVI) in CELL UPDATE message: On transition from
CELL_PCH or URA_PCH, choice between Cell_FACH or CELL_DCH based on TVI and Establishment Cause

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 35
Recovery actions on CELL_DCH to Cell_FACH admission failure:
When the CAC FACH fails at DCH to FACH AO downsize transition, the UE is kept in CELL_DCH until CAC
FACH succeeds (at downsize retry) or conditions for transition to Cell_FACH are not fulfilled anymore.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 36
URA Identity is 16 bits string.
URA can overlap to avoid ping-pong at the border of several URAs.
URA overlapping at the border of two RNCs not supported.
Note: SIB2 implementation is independent of URA_PCH flag. If UraIdentityList under FDDCELL is not empty,
SIB2 will be broadcast in this cell, not taking into account whether URA_PCH is enabled at RNC level.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 37
The Radio Bearers used for the downsized state are provided in the AlwaysOnConf object, including the type of
downsize (Cell_DCH or Cell_FACH).
The list of user services that are eligible to Always On is given through the isAlwaysOnAllowed parameter in
DlUserService and UlUserService objects.
The isAlwaysOnAllowed parameter in DlRbSetConf and UlRbSetConf objects determines the behavior of each
Radio Bearer when the Always-on downsize is triggered. It can take the following values:
Degraded2AlwaysOnOnly means that the downsize is allowed, and the target radio bearers are determined
by the parameters of the AlwaysOnConf object.
releaseOnly means that there is no intermediate downsize for this Radio Bearer. The Radio Bearer is
released when the release conditions are met.
Disabled means that the Always-on feature is disabled for this Radio Bearer.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 38
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 39
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 40
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 41
The mechanism is made of two main functions:
Traffic Monitoring: estimates periodically the user activity in UL and DL at RLC level.
RB Resizing Process: determines whether the current RB needs to be adapted (independently in UL and
DL); this adaption is based on traffic monitoring output, and triggers bit rate resizing if required.

RB Rate Adaptation is applicable to UL and DL Interactive and Background PS. It introduces RB rate
downsizing/upsizing based on user estimated average throughput.
RNC monitors DL and UL traffic and determines if the current RB bit rate needs to be downsized or upsized to
accurately match the actual traffic:
Downsizing
The RNC targets the bit rate as closely as possible to the estimated throughput.
Upsizing
Uplink: The RNC targets the bit rate immediately above the current bit rate (step-by-step upsize).
Downlink: The RNC targets any rate (multi-stages upsize), based on user throughput and RLC buffer
occupancy. The targeted RB bit rate should never exceed the Reference RB bit rate.
DL and UL rate adaptation are performed independently.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 42
The traffic monitoring function consists in calculating the average throughput over a time window and estimating
the confidence level of the observed throughput.
The algorithm used is the same in DL and in UL. The average throughput is estimated at RLC level excluding
retransmissions and acknowledgements.
The algorithm first periodically computes the user throughput over a period of time T (raUnitPeriodTime) as Rate
=N/T where N is the number of RLC-SDU bits transmitted for the first time during T.
Traffic estimates are then based on a sliding window of size K (raNbOfSample).
The estimation of the average throughput R and of the throughput variance S is derived over the last K samples
Rate[k], where each value R[k] corresponding to a throughput value calculated during a period of time T (see
above slide formulas corresponding to an example with K = 3).
The estimated throughput is supposed to follow a Student-t distribution with K degrees of freedom. The
throughput estimate is considered reliable if the probability of the real throughput being out of the interval of
confidence is smaller than a determined threshold (see above slide formulas).
When the throughput estimate is considered reliable, the process to RB rate adaptation resizing is triggered;
otherwise, no action is taken.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 43
The RB Rate Adaptation process can downsize an RB from the current RB rate down to any smaller RB (all
transitions towards a smaller RB are possible except to PS 8k, which is not eligible as target).
Based on Traffic Monitoring, the RNC takes the decision to downsize when the following criteria, which are
periodically checked, are verified:
The observed average throughput is lower than a defined threshold
(dlRbRateAdaptationDownsizeThreshold).
The confidence level of the estimated average throughput is good enough to consider the observation as
reliable.
The RB adaptation process can downsize an RB from the current RB rate down to any RB with lower bit rate but
the allocated RB is always constrained by the iRM table selection.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 44
The RB adaptation process can downsize a Radio Bearer from the current RB rate down to any smaller rate (all
transitions towards smaller RB are possible except to PS 8 kbps).
Based on Traffic Monitoring, the RNC takes the decision to downsize when the following criteria, which are
periodically checked, are verified:
the observed average throughput is lower than a defined threshold
(ulRbRateAdaptationDownsizeThreshold).
the confidence level of the estimated average throughput is good enough to regard the observation as
reliable.
Same criteria and mechanisms as for DL RB Rate Adaptation downsizing apply.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 45
Multi-stages Upsize avoids successive reconfigurations intermediate bit rates in order to reach directly the most
suitable RB rate.
The RB adaptation process can upsize an RB from the current RB rate up to any RB with higher bit rate but the
allocated RB is always lower than or equal to the Reference RB and is constrained by the iRM table selection.
Based on Traffic Monitoring, the RNC takes the decision to upsize according to the following criteria, which are
periodically checked:
The observed average throughput is higher than a threshold (dlRbRateAdaptationUpsizeThreshold).
The confidence level of the estimated average throughput is good enough to consider the observation
reliable.
RLC-SDU buffer occupancy (in %) is higher than a threshold (raSduQueueThreshold).
If the Multi-Step DL Upsize algorithm is activated
(dlRbRateAdaptationUpsizeAlgorithm = multiStageUpsize and not stepByStepUpsize),
then the RNC selects the target RB according to the DL RLC-SDU buffer occupancy. It compares the current
value of the RLC buffer occupancy (in bytes) to a threshold in order to find the highest RB for which the following
condition is met: RLC-SDU Buffer Occupancy (in bytes) ≥ raSduQueueThresholdBytes
If no RB higher than the current RB meets this condition, the upsize is not performed; it means that few data are
waiting for transmission.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 46
A step-by-step upsize scheme applies for the UL RB Rate Adaptation.
It means that the only possible transitions are from the current RB to a target RB, which is the next RB in terms of
bit rate. In this case, the RNC selects the bit rate immediately above the current one, since the Traffic Monitoring
can only indicate that current bit rate is not big enough.
There is no forecast on the future traffic based on the UE RLC buffer occupancy (and consequently multi-stage
upsize is not possible).
Based on Traffic Monitoring, the RNC takes the decision to upsize when the following criteria, which are
periodically checked, are verified:
The observed average throughput is higher than some defined thresholds,
The confidence level of the estimated average throughput is good enough to consider the observation as
reliable.
The allocated UL bit rate can never exceed the Reference RB bit rate.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 47
From UA07 onwards, UL upsizing based on UL throughput is enhanced by a mechanism based on UE Buffer
Occupancy.

Measurement is set up on the UE to monitor the RLC Buffer Occupancy (BO). The Transmit power of the UE is
also monitored as an additional measurement if enabled (isUeTxPowerOn4AAllowed="True").

The BO is monitored thru an average over measQtyAverageTime; as soon it goes above a given threshold
(ul4AThreshold) during a given period of time (ul4ATimeToTrigger), an Event4A is sent to the RNC.

Upon reception of a 4A Measurement Report from the UE, the RNC determines the selected data rate as a
function of the iRM algorithm, OAM maximum Step size ul4AMaxRateStep and the UE Tx power headroom
described in the following two slides.

Further reports are inhibited for a pending time to trigger rcMeasPendingTriggerTime.

The advantage of this type of measurement is a quicker reaction of RNC to resource allocation needs
compared to decision based on throughput variation but we may face some excessive usage of resources due
to upsize to the highest RB.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 48
If the usage of UE Tx power is not enabled (isUeTxPowerOn4AAllowed Set to false), then the Upsize procedure
will target an RB based only on the threshold ul4AMaxRateStep.

This RB reconfiguration will be limited by the iRM table and reference RB rate.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 49
The aim of this algorithm is to assure that once the UETxPower is equal or greater than the
UeTxPowerOffsetFromMax4A, then Rate_TxHeadroom will be equal or smaller than Current_Rate; this means
that no upsize will be taken.

If isUeTxPowerOn4AAllowed is set to "True" then after receiving the UE MR, the RNC will:
Determine the Current_Rate and the Max_UL_rate from ul4AMaxRateStep.
Calculate PowerOffsetMax = min ( ( UlUsPowerConf: maxAllowedUlTxPower, UEmaxpower) - UE
Transmitted Power (taken from MR IE).
Calculate the Headroom(dB) = PowerOffsetMax - UeTxPowerOffsetFromMax4A
Rate_TxHeadroom= [Current_Rate * 10^(Headroom (dB)/10) rounded down to the nearest supported rate]
Selected_Rate = Min (Rate_TxHeadroom, ul4AMaxRateStep)
Once this algorithm is finished, and if Headroom is Positive, a UL Upsize RB Reconfiguration is done.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 50
From UA07 onwards, DL upsizing based on DL throughput is enhanced by a mechanism based on RNC Buffer
Occupancy.

This DL buffer measurement is performed using an average over boAverageTimeDlDch. Setting the
boThresholdDlDch to the value 0 disables the algorithm in DL.

The reconfiguration is on a step-by-step upsize. Therefore, if the actual Current_DL_Rate is set to PS64, the
upsize triggers an RB reconfiguration to DL PS 128 if permitted by OAM settings.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 51
The Buffer Occupancy (BO) measurements allow the upsize of RB on a step-by-step procedure for DL.
The activation flags of throughput RB rate adaptation do not need to be enabled, as this mechanism is
independent of previously described throughput mechanism.
Once the BO fulfils the threshold defined, the RB reconfiguration is triggered towards the next PS I/B Radio
Bearer available and as long as the iRM Table and Reference RB are respected.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 52
In DL as in UL, there is the same anti ping-pong mechanism in order to avoid continuous RB reconfigurations in
case of abnormal traffic conditions.
The UeTrafficVolumeInhibitTimer timer will be set after the last RB reconfiguration. Another RB Reconfiguration
can only take place after this timer expiry. This timer is not considered in case RB Reconfigurations triggered by
other causes.

Important:
Before UA07, rbRateAdaptationPingPongTimer was triggered whenever a RRA mechanism occurred (Buffer or
Traffic related).
From UA07 onwards, this timer is still triggered on any RRA; however, it does not prevent the Buffer Occupancy
(BO) mechanisms, introduced in UA07, from taking place. Only UeTrafficVolumeInhibitTimer, which is triggered
only by a BO event, will be verified before processing any additional BO event for RRA.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 53
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 54
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 55
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 56
The iRM Scheduling mechanism is based on two sequential procedures triggered to adapt user throughput when
he goes alternately through good and bad radio conditions:
iRM Scheduling Downgrade reduces bit rate when radio conditions are getting bad.
iRM Scheduling Upgrade increases bit rate when radio conditions are getting better.
iRM Scheduling Downgrade is based on Transmit Code Power: trigger is based on a measurement done by the
Node B. The dedicated measurement is performed on the primary cell; it concerns the Downlink Transmitted
Code Power.
The trigger based on TxCP dedicated measurement can be applied if the primary cell is handled by the serving
RNC or on a DRNC since iRM Scheduling on TxCP is supported over Iur from UA05 release.
irmSchedDowngradeTxcpMaxBitRate is the parameter specifying the fallback RB bit rate in case of iRM
Scheduling downgrade.
The flipFlopUpDowngradeTimer parameter allows avoiding ping-pong phenomena between RB upgrade and
downgrade.
iRM Scheduling/ RB rate adaptation dependency:
In case if RB rate adaptation is enabled for the service, after iRM scheduling downgrade, the service is
flagged as ineligible for rate adaptation upsize. When an event B is reported, the iRM scheduling upgrade is
triggered, so the service come back eligible for RB rate adaptation upsize. Hence, bit rate upsize will not be
performed immediately by iRM scheduling but rather with RB rate adaptation algorithm if necessary.

The isIrmSchedulingOverIurAllowed parameter has to be set to "True" on both SRNC and DRNC for the
support of iRM Scheduling over Iur to be effective.
Moreover, the global activation flags for both SRNC and DRNC on the RadioAccessService object have to be
set to "True": isIrmSchedDowngradeTxcpAllowed and isIrmSchedulingUpgradeAllowed.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 57
For iRM Scheduling Downgrade based on TxCP, the detection of degradation in radio conditions relies on the
monitoring of the DL Transmitted Code Power (TxCP). The TxCP trigger is based on NBAP Dedicated
Measurement (type Event A) performed by the Node B handling the primary cell.
When the transmitted code power (TxCP) rises above a threshold (TxCP threshold) during the hysteresis time
(timeToTrigger), a Dedicated Measurement Report is sent by the Node B to the RNC (Event A).

Event A configuration relies on:


Measurement Threshold: the relative transmitted code power threshold given by the threshold_data parameter is
used to compute the absolute TxCP Threshold together with the pcpichPower (FDDCell) and maxDlTxPower
(DlUsPowerConf) parameters.
Measurement Hysteresis: timeToTrigger

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 58
When a UE uses the RB assigned by IRM Scheduling downgrade, the RNC configures two types of NBAP
dedicated measurements by event B report for this UE on the primary cell.
So each time the primary cell changes, the RNC terminates measurements on the old primary cell and initiates
measurements on the new primary cell.

Event B1 configuration relies on:


Measurement Threshold: the relative transmitted code power threshold given by the parameter
highB1ThresholdDelta is used to compute the absolute TxCP Threshold together with the parameters
pcpichPower (FDDCell) and maxDlTxPower (DlUsPowerConf)
Measurement Hysteresis: given by the parameter highB1TimeToTrigger

Event B2 configuration relies on:


Measurement Threshold: relative transmitted code power threshold given by highB1ThresholdDelta +
mediumB2ThresholdDeltaOverHighB1 together with the parameters pcpichPower (FDDCell) and maxDlTxPower
Measurement Hysteresis: given by highB1TimeToTrigger + mediumB2TimeToTriggerOverHighB1

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 59
Any user becomes eligible for iRM Scheduling upgrade as soon as it experiences an iRM Scheduling downgrade.
This means that after the RB reconfiguration bringing about the downgrade, the RNC configures and activates the
NBAP dedicated measurement report on the primary cell to track the transmitted code power (see section 4).

On reception of the NBAP Dedicated Measurement Report, the SRNC executes the RAB matching function
taking into account that the Power RB (H or I), corresponding to the event reported (B1 or B2), will be the highest
rate able to be allocated to this mobile.
On reception of the NBAP Dedicated Measurement report, the RNC proceeds to the Synchronous Radio Link
Reconfiguration (SRLR) if the Granted RB is different from the current one. So the anti ping-pong timer
flipFlopUpDowngradeTimer is started.
This timer should allow slow ping-pong phenomena between upgrading and downgrading if observed. At its
expiry, a NBAP dedicated measurement can be initiated if in the meantime an iRM scheduling downgrade has
been performed for the mobile.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 60
Since high bit rate RBs are radio resources consuming, enhanced RRM is required to optimize radio resources
usage.
iRM Scheduling Downgrade
Downgrading - similar to I/B but RNC selects the fallback bit rate that is equal or immediately above
the GBR
Upgrading - similar to I/B but RNC selects the fallback bit rate that is equal or immediately above the
GBR
Always-on and RB Rate Adaptation are not applicable to PS streaming RABs.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 61
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 62
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 63
The Service Change and UDI Fallback (SCUDIF) is a function, which applies to Unrestricted Digital Information
/ Restricted Digital Information (UDI/RDI) multimedia calls.
It allows users to achieve successful call establishment when end-to-end Circuit Switched (CS) multimedia is not
possible (fallback to speech) or when signaling of the feature is not possible in the network (fallback to preferred
service or speech).
Spec Reference 3GTS 23.172

Fallback to Speech
FBtS (which applies to the call setup phase only) permits to attempt a setup of a VT call, and to revert
automatically to a speech connection:
3G VT user to 3G non-VT user
3G VT user to user on non-VT network

User Initiated Service Change (UI-SCUDIF)


This is the case where one of 3G users (originator or terminator) manually invokes a change in call type for an in-
progress call, from VT to speech or from speech to VT. There are several possible reasons for this call change
(e.g. privacy, performance, and cost).
In order to invoke this procedure, the UE shall send a MODIFY message containing the BC-IE to change to. This
BC-IE must be one of those already negotiated at call setup.

Network Initiated Service Change (NI-SCUDIF)

The basic premise of NI-SCUDIF is that under certain conditions the network makes the determination that a
service change from VT to speech (or vice versa) is required, and invokes the signaling required to change the
call type from 64KUDI to speech (or speech to 64KUDI).
When the radio access network detects a lack of sufficient resources to sustain the multimedia RAB configuration,
RNC shall inform the visited MSC by sending a RANAP Modify Request message to the visited MSC. The visited
MSC shall then:
Initiate an In-Call Modification procedure to speech towards the UE it serves using the MODIFY message.
Invoke the service change procedure towards the remote side.
Trigger the RAB modification by sending a RANAP RAB Assignment with the RAB requested to be
modified to the RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 64
The TxCP event A measurement threshold for VT downgrade is calculated as below:
Threshold_eventA = pcpichPower_primary_cell + maxDlTxPowerPerOls_Gold_OLS – triggerThresholdDelta
HysteresisTime_eventA = timeToTrigger

The timeToTrigger and triggerThresholdDelta are in the new MOC:


ServiceChangeTxcpVideoToSpeechForThisUserService

An established VT call is downgraded to a speech call based on:


1. Radio criterion

Radio criterion is based on an OAM radio threshold value for VT downgrade.


Radio criterion is based on the event A NodeB TxCP radio measurement for VT.
The VT-Speech downgrade trigger threshold is intended be set to a value which ensures the
transition to a speech call occurs before the alarm handover to 2G cell is triggered.
2. In case of an improper value of the VT-Speech downgrade trigger threshold, TxCP measurement event A
is not triggered before alarm handover to 2G cell is triggered. The RNC shall initiate a VT downgrade if
2G core network does not support VT service (based on an OAM parameter).
3. In case of other iMCTA reasons triggered handover to 2G cell, the RNC shall initiate a VT downgrade if
the 2G core network does not support the VT service (based on an OAM parameter).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 65
The TxCP event B measurement threshold for VT upgrade is calculated as below:

Threshold_eventB = pcpichPower_primary_cell + maxDlTxPowerPerOls_Gold_OLS – triggerThresholdDelta


HysteresisTime_eventB = timeToTrigger

The timeToTrigger and triggerThresholdDelta are in the new MOC:


ServiceChangeTxcpSpeechToVideoForThisUserService

A VT call downgraded to Speech call may be upgraded (back) to a VT call based on:

1. Radio criterion is based on an OAM radio threshold value for VT upgrade.


2. Radio criterion is based on the event B Node B TxCP radio measurement for speech.
3. The Speech-VT upgrade trigger threshold is intended to be set to a value which allows a previous
downgrade (i.e. downgraded from VT to speech) to be upgraded back to VT when the radio conditions
improve significantly.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 66
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 67
These parameters define the TxCP threshold absolute value and TTT SCUDIF Video Telephony to Speech (and
vice versa) for cells managed by the neighboring RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 68
These parameters define the TxCP threshold absolute value and TTT SCUDIF Video Telephony to Speech (and
vice versa) for cells managed by the neighboring RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 69
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 70
The purpose of iRM Preemption is to keep some resources available when the cell becomes loaded. iRM
Preemption is a reactive process; it is performed when other preventive congestion solutions are not sufficient to
free OVSF codes and power resources quickly enough to maintain sufficient accessibility to the network.
The iRM Pre-emption has the following characteristics:
Is a preventive mechanism (does not react on access failures but try to anticipate the congestion to avoid
them).
Is only applicable to DCH and not to HSDPA/E-DCH.
Is only applicable to DL.
Consists in downgrading current users if their allocated bit rate is higher than the one they would get in a
RED cell with a Radio Link Red (DL).
Does not provide any upsize mechanism for downgraded users. They may retrieve the initial requested radio
bearer after any reconfiguration (CS release, CS establishment when a PS connection is on-going, iRM
Scheduling Upgrade, AO Upsize, etc.) except the AO Downsize and iRM Scheduling Downgrade
procedures.
Is an asynchronous process (when the cell becomes congested, the whole community of users is not
downgraded in a single step).
May be activated/de-activated by OLS.
Thus, iRM Preemption completes the existing congestion prevention iRM RAB to RB Mapping feature by
implementing a reactive congestion management at the cell level.
Note: IRM pre-emption feature activation requires that parameters isIrmOnRlConditionAllowed and
isIrmOnCellColourAllowed set to "True".

If current DL RB bit rate > iRM preemption downgraded RB bit rate


Then preemption is processed and the downgrade is performed towards iRM preemption downgraded RB bit rate.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 71
The transition from a normal to a congested state is computed when one of the following thresholds is
crossed:
normal2CongestedCLCThreshold (for codes)
normal2CongestedPLCThreshold (for power)
normal2CongestedDlCEMThreshold (for CEM load)
normal2CongestedDlTLCThreshold (for Iub)

In order to avoid any ping-pong effect between the congested and normal states, due to strong variations in
the radio resources allocation, the hysteresis cycle relies on additional thresholds characterizing the
congested to normal transition through the parameters:
congested2NormalCLCThreshold (for codes)
congested2NormalPLCThreshold (for power)
congested2NormalDlCEMThreshold (for CEM load)
normal2CongestedDlTLCThreshold (for Iub)

In the case of soft handover, the active set color is derived from the color of each cell.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 72
The target Radio Bearers for iRM Preemption are defined using:
the iRM Tables: irmRbRate as a function of (DlRbSetConf, OLS)
fallbackRbRate as a function of DlRbSetConf
They correspond to the Radio Bearers UEs would have received if UEs were admitted as the Radio Link
Condition was Bad and the Cell Color was Red.
Therefore, users eligible to iRM preemption are users whose current DL Bit Rate is higher than the one defined
for bad radio conditions and loaded cells.
As iRM tables are constructed making use of A/R Priority, iRM Preemption offers the possibility to preempt users
according to their OLS level.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 73
As soon as a downlink PS I/B radio bearer is allocated to a UE, the iRM preemption timer assigned to each
eligible mobile is armed. At each expiration of this UE timer, the cell preemption color is checked; the eligible user
is preempted if the cell is congested, and if the following condition based on the bit rate comparison is fulfilled:
If
current DL RB bit rate > iRM preemption downgraded RB bit rate
Then
preemption is processed and the downgrade is performed.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 74
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 75
UA06.0: Introduction of new Pre-emption feature (33322)
Reactive mechanism (trigger is CAC failure)
Independent from the iRM
Applicable to DCH as well as HS-DSCH and E-DCH transport channels
Dl and UL
Applicable to all services
The UA06.0 Pre-emption is triggered by a CAC failure, meaning that no resources are available to accept the
incoming call. It may be:
DL Power
DL OVSF Codes
CEM (UL and DL)
Transport (restriction in UA06.0: Iub/Iur CAC failure not eligible)
The CAC failure may happen at Call Establishment or during mobility procedure.
The system will then try to free some resources by downgrading (PS only) or releasing lower priority services to
be able to accept the incoming user.
The preemption shall only be a reactive mechanism that aims at allocating the preempted resources to the
service that triggered the preemption.
The preemption is performed in best effort mode: the resources freed by the Preemption will not be necessarily
allocated to the user that triggered the preemption

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 76
When a CAC failure occurs during one of the following procedures, the procedure continues either by processing
a failure case or by queuing (see below the comment for each procedure).

Simultaneously, a pre-emption action may be launched in order to free resources in each congested cell.
The freed resource might be used by the call that triggered the Pre-emption or not as part of the best effort
algorithm implemented.
Note 1: an incoming relocation in the target RNC shall not trigger pre-emption. Queuing is forbidden for
relocation.
Note 2: an iMCTA upon service reason shall not trigger pre-emption nor in the source cell nor in the target cell.
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 77
The S-RNC may decide to launch preemption in a cell when it faces up a CAC failure during the following
resource allocation procedures:

NBAP procedures: NBAP Radio Link setup failure, NBAP Radio Link addition failure, NBAP Synchronized
Radio Link Reconfiguration failure, NBAP Radio Link Reconfiguration failure using one of the following NBAP
failure cause: “DL radio resources not available”, “UL radio resources not available” and “Node B Resources
Unavailable”

Internal DL power allocation

Internal DL channelization code allocation

These resource allocation procedures concern DCH, E-DCH, or HS-DSCH resources allocation.

Others functions as HSxPA fallback or iMCTA may also solve the CAC failure situation depending on the trigger
eligibility and the feature activation. The order of the procedures is the following:
1-HSxPA fallback 2-iMCTA 3-preemption.

The resources allocation requests done through RNSAP procedures are not eligible to preemption.

An ALU D-RNC will never launch a pre-emption process.

Iub and Iur resource allocation failures do not call the pre-emption function.

Note: The NBAP failure cause « Node B Resources Unavailable » identifies a resource allocation failure without
indication of the direction, which may be downlink, uplink or downlink and uplink.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 78
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 79
isPreemptionAllowedForHsdpa: Parameter to activate/deactivate the preemption process when a CAC failure
occurs during a HSDPA allocation (i.e. HS-DSCH resources)

isPreemptionAllowedForEdch: Parameter to activate/deactivate the preemption process when a CAC failure


occurs during a HSUPA allocation (i.e. E-DCH resources)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 80
Preemption Capability Preemption Vulnerability
Services P-Service Priority
(PC) (PV)
Emergency Y N 0
Speech Y N 1
VoIP** Y N 2
Video Telephony Y N 3
CS Streaming Y Y 4
PS Streaming Y Y 5
Signalling PS *
Y N 6
Interactive
PS Interactive N Y 7
PS Backgroung N Y 8

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 81
In each congested cell, a search of P-Services to be pre-empted carrying a traffic channel is processed by
applying a downgrade or/and a release. The preemption criteria for each P-Service are taken into account.
The preemption process ends when the expected resource quantity to be de-allocated is achieved or when there
is no P-Service to pre-empt anymore.
The selection induces the following steps:
The RNC selects all P-Services which are vulnerable (P-Preemption Vulnerability equal to “pre-emptable”)
with a P-Service priority lower or equal to the P-Service requesting the pre-emption
According to the CAC failure cause the P-services which don’t allow the de-allocation of the resource
requested are filtered:
When the CAC failure cause is for Node B reason, a specific filtering applies:
The P-Service candidate to be pre-empted is filtered if it has not the same transport type as the
service requested.
When the CAC failure cause is for code or power reason, all P-Services using HS-DSCH or DL DCH
resources are candidate to be pre-empted.
Then the RNC:
only keeps the users with an OLS lower or equal to the OLS of the user requesting the pre-emption if
they are using different P-Service(s).
only keeps the users with an OLS strictly lower than the OLS of the user requesting the pre-emption if
they are using the same Pservice(s).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 82
Then the RNC starts to preempt the user with the lowest OLS within the lowest service priority by applying first a
rate downgrading action if eligible.
When there are no more users of the lowest OLS, the RNC goes on with upper OLS.
Then when there is no more user to downgrade, a second step of pre-emption using a release (if allowed for the
service) may apply to the users not already selected for downgrading (lowest OLS first) and to the users ineligible
to the downgrading (see note 1).
When there are no more users in this Service priority, the RNC goes on with the upper Service.
Note 1: There is no selection order between downgraded users and users ineligible to downgrading.
A user is ineligible for downgrading due to the Service (example: speech), the GBR, the transport type. When pre-
emption is processed for a given CAC failure, a service eligible for “downgrading then release” may only be either
downgraded or released: When it is downgraded, it will be candidate to the release at the next pre-emption
function call.
Note 2: For a given priority and a given OLS, a downgrading or a release applies by the highest expected gain in
term of radio bit rate. Therefore, the pre-emption order is Service, OLS, and then radio bit rate gain whatever the
CAC failure reason.
Note 3: A release action may apply to the following Services:
Services which are never eligible to rate downgrading:
CS Speech, CSD, CS streaming, PS Conversational
Services which may be eligible to release according to an OAM parameter:
PS streaming, PS Interactive, PS Background
A service established on HS-DSCH may only be released.
A service established on E-DCH may only be released.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 83
An uplink target rate and/or a downlink target rate are set by OAM for each service per OLS.
The RB and the requested target rates are given by the pre-emption function to the RAB matching function, which
selects the bearers with the nearest and lower or equal rate to the target rate.
When the RAB matching selects a service configuration with a sum of rate higher than the previous service
configuration, the call is not modified (this use case may apply when the call has others services which are
upgraded by the RAB matching function).
For a given priority and a given OLS, a downgrading or a release applies by the highest expected gain in term of
radio bit rate. Therefore, the pre-emption order is Service, OLS, and then radio bit rate gain whatever the CAC
failure reason.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 84
An estimation of the resource needed has to be done in the following CAC failure cases:
NodeB: DCH resource allocation failure
Code: DCH or HS-DSCH resource allocation failure
Power: DCH or HS-DSCH resource allocation failure
When the CAC failure occurs at Node B level for HS-DSCH or E-DCH resource allocation, a “one to one” release action is
processed (i.e. a P-Service established on HS-DSCH or E-DCH is released) without taken into account the resource quantity
used.
In order to have a common estimator of all resources to be de-allocated, whatever where the CAC failure occurs, the
estimation of resources needed is based on:
the current radio bit rates if the CAC failure concerns DCH resources allocation on Node B or RNC sides (power and
code). The resource quantity to be de-allocated in a congested cell is based on the sum of radio estimated downlink
rates needed to establish all P-Services of the call in this cell.
the fair bit rate if the CAC failure concerns HSDPA resources allocation at RNC side (power and code). The resource
quantity to be de-allocated in a congested cell is based on the sum of fair bit rates needed to establish all P-Services of
the call in this cell. The fair bit rate of a P-Service is calculated by the fair sharing function and is either the GBR, the
MinBR (defined by OAM) if non-null or the minHsDschReservationForCac (defined by OAM).
The resource de-allocation calculation uses a de-allocation factor (defined by OAM) to major the quantity of resources to be
freed. The unit is the Kbits/sec. The resource to be freed is defined by the formula:
Ul resource rate to be freed= Ul Radio rate to be allocated * Ul de-allocation factor
Dl resource rate to be freed= Dl Radio rate or fair bit rate to be allocated * Dl de-allocation factor
The de-allocation factor depends on the resource quantity to be freed:
If the resource quantity <= threshold, the de-allocation factor used is the high factor value defined by OAM
If the resource quantity > threshold, the de-allocation factor used is the low factor value defined by OAM

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 85
The queuing is done at RNC level.
The queuing is allowed for the RAB Assignment procedure only.
When the queuing decision is taken, an allocation retry timer is set and the resource allocation request is retried
when the timer elapses (end of congestion is not used as trigger):
The pre-empted resources might not be re-allocated to the particular service that triggered the preemption.
The preempted resources may be allocated to a service having the same or higher priority and the same or
higher OLS compared with the service that triggered the preemption.
The RAB matching or/and the IRM table procedures have to be processed at each resource allocation request
(re-)attempt in order to set the target AsConf (UL and DL) to be served.
The resource allocation request is retried until the resource is available or max number of retries is reached.
As the RANAP RAB Assignment is constrained at the Core Network level by the timer T RAB Assgt (in
TS125.413), the following relationship has to be checked:
preemptionQueuingReallocationTimer * preemptionQueuingReallocationRetryMaxNumber < TRabAssgt
Moreover, an attribute preemptionQueuingReallocationPriority is defined for each Pservice.
The possible values are:
• Priority reallocation: for Emergency Call
• Regular reallocation: for all other services
As soon as the pre-emption is triggered on a given cell and a RAB Assignment Request is queued, the cell goes
from “Normal state” to “Cell pre-emption state” and a resource allocation filtering is performed in order to
restrict the allocation in the congested cell.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 86
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 87
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 88
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 89
Principle
Before release UA04.2, the bearer service support for AMR was restricted to mono-mode AMR, i.e. bearer
service support for AMR 12.2 and support of silent mode (aka SCR (VAD/DTX)) with use of version 1 of Iu UP.
The features 18717 “AMR-NB multi-mode support” and 30229 “Iu User Plane Frame Protocol Version 2” provide
the bearer service support with use of version 2 of Iu UP for a number of narrowband AMR speech services and
the support of a number of functions to allow core network Transcoder / Tandem Free mode of Operation
(TrFO/TFO) speech calls.
Multimode AMR support offers:
Downlink capacity gain in terms of OVSF code resource. SF 256 can be used for AMR Low Rate
configuration.
Downlink capacity gain in terms of radio resource. The required signal to interference ratio depends on the
required throughput. Therefore, a lower AMR throughput will require less power.
UL coverage gain. The required transmitted power will be reduced for lower AMR rate.
AMR Rate Control
In UA05.0, the RNC does not initiate Iu rate control towards the CN except in relocation scenarios.
If Iu UP used is version 2, the RNC may receive Iu rate control from the CN in case of TrFO/TFO. When that
happens, the RNC triggers an RRC TFC control indicating the new max allowed rate in the uplink.
SRB2 is used to carry the RRC TFC control message.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 90
During the call, no Radio Bearer adaptation based on cell load (power, code) is performed. The allocated RB
(speech part) is kept unchanged. During the call, the RNC will only control the AMR rate. The principle is the
following:
At the establishment, once the UE is eligible for AMR rate control, the RNC will perform:
In downlink, any rate control done. The maximum rate 12.2 Kbps is given at establishment.
In uplink, a rate control is performed on the UL Cell Load criteria, which give the maximum rate at call
establishment.
During the call, driven by rate control triggers, the RNC adjusts AMR rates by initiating RRC TFC control on
uplink and Iu UP rate control on downlink.

Procedure description:
Depending on the outcome of the IUB load table, the RNC initiates:
DL Rate control: Iu UP Rate Control frames sent to the core network.
UL rate control: RRC TFC control messages sent to the UE.
Whenever applicable, the rate is decreased step by step. This means that several Iu UP rate control / RRC TFC
control messages may be successively sent.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 91
A specific iRM table is introduced to determine the max allowed AMR rate based on the OLS and the Iub DS DL
load color of the Active Set.
The Iub DS load is only calculated for the DL assuming that in most of the cases the traffic over Iub DS is rather
symmetric or asymmetric services with higher rate in the DL.
In order to avoid any ping-pong effects due to the application of different criteria, the downlink rate upgrade is not
triggered based on Iub DS load color change. Only the trigger of TxCP measurement report is used to upgrade
the rate of an AMR call.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 92
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 93
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 94
At establishment of a speech bearer eligible to rate control, the RNC configures NBAP dedicated measurement
reporting on the primary cell in order to track the DL Transmitted Code Power.
Thus, the ALCATEL-LUCENT RNC can detect deterioration or improvement of radio conditions through NBAP
dedicated measurements on the transmitted code power.
DL Tx CP criteria: Dedicated measurements configuration
In order to detect a rate decrease / increase condition, the RNC configures dedicated measurement reporting with
the following characteristics.
Measurement quantity = transmitted code power (Radio Link)
Reporting mode = event triggered
Event = A / B
Threshold 1 = RateDecThreshold
Threshold 2 = RateIncThreshold
Time to trigger = RateDecTTT / RateIncTTT. This time to trigger indicates the time during which the
threshold condition should be fulfilled before the UE sends the event to the RNC.
(see also next page)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 95
Threshold 1 = RateDecThreshold
Threshold 2 = RateIncThreshold
Time to trigger = RateDecTTT / RateIncTTT. This time to trigger indicates the time during which the
threshold condition should be fulfilled before the UE sends the event to the RNC.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 96
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 97
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 98
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 99
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 100
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 101
Following changes in Traffic Class are supported:
(CS) + PS Interactive to/from (CS) + PS Background
(CS) + PS Interactive + PS Interactive to/from (CS) + PS Interactive + PS Background
(CS) + PS Interactive + PS Background to/from (CS) + PS Interactive + PS Interactive
(CS) + PS Interactive + PS Background to/from (CS) + PS Background + PS Background

Streaming traffic class cannot be changed; however, in a RAB combination, that includes a streaming RAB, the
I/B part can be modified:
(CS) + PS Streaming + PS Interactive to/from (CS) + PS Streaming + PS Background

Traffic Class change may lead to AsConf change, thus an SRLR procedure and it may result in change of OLS,
HSDPA SPI, E-DCH SPI, MLP, and minBR.

When the Core Network changes the Traffic Class, a new scheduling priority (SPI) is deduced by the RNC and
is provided to the HSDPA and HSUPA schedulers.

isPsRabModificationFullFeatureAllowed: RAB modification (full feature) activation flag, which allows


parameters TC, MBR, ARP, THP, and SI of a Ps Streaming or Ps I/B RAB to be modified

This UA07 feature is the extension of the UA06 feature PM31039 – PS CN RAB Modification, available in the
Korean market. The parameter isPsRabModificationAllowed was introduced with the UA06 feature; it must be
set accordingly, so that the UA07 feature operates as desired.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 102
MBR changes may apply to UL and DL for Interactive, Background, and Streaming RABs.

For PS I/B RAB (in mono or multi-service):


A SRLR will occur if the new Granted bit rate, after RAB Matching, is different from the current bit rate (for
R’99 bearers).
In case of HS-DSCH and E-DCH, there will be no SRLR.

For PS Streaming RAB (in mono or multi-service):


In all cases, an SRLR will occur if the new Granted bit rate is different from the current bit rate.

For an MBR modification, the new value is taken into account to limit the user throughput in the RNC if the
source conformance mechanism is enabled (a reduced MBR can be applied in uplink and/or downlink to a user
generating a very high data volume leading to an unfair resource usage).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 103
An ARP or THP modification may result in change of OLS, HSDPA SPI, E-DCH SPI, MLP, and minBR.
For RABs mapped on DCH, an SRLR will occur if the new Granted bit rate is different from the current bit rate.
For RABs mapped on HS-DSCH or E-DCH, whenever an SPI occurs, the Node B must be notified of the new SPI
value (the UE is notified for E-DCH).

If isPsRabModificationFullFeatureAllowed = "True", then isPsRabModificationAllowed = "True".


If isPsRabModificationAllowed = "True", then isTrspBearerReplacementAllowedOnSrnc4Dch = "True"
(transport bearer replacement is mandatory on the serving side to support RAB modification).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 104
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 105
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.7 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 7 · Page 106
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 4
Page

1 Network selection 7
1.1 PLMN selection 8
2 Cell selection in idle mode 9
2.1 Cell selection criteria 10
2.2 UE power compensation 11
3 Cell reselection in idle mode principles 12
3.1 General concept 13
3.2 Mobility in idle mode, Cell_FACH, Cell_PCH and URA_PCH 14
3.3 Idle mode neighboring list 15
3.4 Cell reselection eligibility criteria 16
3.5 High mobility detection 17
4 Cell reselection in idle mode without HCS 18
4.1 Measurements rules without HCS 19
4.2 Level ranking criterion without HCS 20
4.3 Quality ranking criterion without HCS 21
4.4 Cell ranking algorithm 22
4.5 Triggering algorithm 23
4.6 Exercise: multi-layer cell structure, HCS not used 24
5 Cell reselection in idle mode with HCS 26
5.1 Principles 27
5.2 Measurements rules with HCS in low mobility 28
5.3 HCS quality level threshold criterion 29
5.4 Measurements rules with HCS in high mobility 30
5.5 Level and quality ranking criteria with HCS 31
5.6 HCS cell filtering in low mobility 32
5.7 HCS cell filtering in high mobility 33
5.8 Cell ranking algorithm 34
5.9 Triggering algorithm 35
5.10 Exercise: multi-layer cell structure, HCS used 36
6 Cell reselection in non-DCH connected mode 38
6.1 SIB 4 and SIB 12 broadcast 39
6.2 SIB3 & SIB11 parameters & objects 40
6.3 SIB4 parameters & objects 41
6.4 SIB12 parameters & objects – UMTS FDD neighbor 42
6.5 SIB11 & SIB12 parameters & objects – GSM neighbor 43
6.6 Exercises 44
6.6.1 Exercise 1: mono-layer topology 45
6.6.2 Exercise 2: bi-layer topology 46
6.6.3 Exercise 3: tri-layer topology 48
7 3G to 4G inter-RAT cell reselection 51
7.1 Support of SIB19 52
7.2 LTE neighboring definition 54
7.3 Measurement rules 55
7.4 LTE neighboring cell criteria 56
7.5 Priority parameters 58
7.6 Other parameters 59
8 Cell status and reservation 60
8.1 Cell status and reservation process 61
9 Location registration 62
9.1 LAC/RAC/SAC 63

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 5
Page

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 7
The different UMTS networks in the world are identified uniquely by the PLMN identifier composed of:
the Mobile Country Code (MCC)
the Mobile Network Code (MNC)
For one carrier, once the cell search procedure is completed, the UE has found the strongest cell and knows its
scrambling code. It is then possible to decode the Primary CCPCH.
The MNC and MCC are part of the system information broadcast on the P-CCPCH (in the Master Information
Block or MIB).
The UE then decodes the received PLMN identifiers and determines whether or not the PLMN is permitted
according to the lists of preferred and forbidden PLMN (stored in the UE).
If the PLMN is permitted and chosen, the cell selection parameters are used by the UE to determine which cell to
camp on.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 8
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 9
Squal and SRxLev are the two quantities used for cell selection criteria.

If the criteria are fulfilled, the UE moves to the camped normally state where the following tasks will be performed:
Select and monitor the indicated PICH and PCH.
Monitor relevant System Information.
Perform measurements for the cell reselection evaluation procedure.

If the criteria are not fulfilled, the UE will attempt to camp on the strongest cell of any PLMN and enter in the
camped on any cell state where it can only obtain limited service (emergency calls). The following tasks will be
performed in the camped on any cell state:
Monitor relevant System Information.
Perform measurements for the cell reselection evaluation procedure.
Regularly attempt to find a suitable cell trying all radio access technologies that are supported by the UE. If a
suitable cell is found, the cell selection process restarts.

The above parameters are broadcast in SIB3.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 10
Pcompensation = max (sibmaxAllowedUlTxPowerOnRach – P_MAX, 0).
Pcompensation is a compensation factor to penalize the low power mobiles.
sibMaxAllowedUlTxPowerOnRach = maximum transmit power level the UE is allowed to use while
accessing the cell on RACH.
P_MAX = maximum output power of the UE according to its power class.
Class 1: P_MAX= 33 dBm
Class 2: P_MAX= 27 dBm
Class 3: P_MAX= 24 dBm
Class 4: P_MAX= 21 dBm

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 11
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 12
Cell Reselection without HCS differs from UA04.2 only by the fact that High Mobility Detection is used in the
reselection triggering timer.
Cell Reselection with HCS was introduced in UA05.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 13
Cell Reselection without HCS differs from UA04.2 only by the fact that High Mobility Detection is used in the
reselection triggering timer.
Cell Reselection with HCS was introduced in UA05.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 14
The list of neighboring cells is broadcasted through SYSInfo.
The information and parameters related to the neighboring cells are contained into two subtrees in the Radio
Access Network Model:
UmtsNeighbouring FddCell for FDD intra- and inter-frequency neighbors
GSMNeighbouringCell for GSM neighbors

An algorithm is used to declare and control correctly the list of neighboring cells in order to differentiate between
the configuration of idle mode/Cell_FACH mode neighbors (sent in SIB11) and Cell_DCH connected mode
neighbors. The idle mode/Cell_FACH mode neighboring list is a subset of the Cell_DCH connected mode
neighboring list. The differentiation is set through the sib11OrDchUsage parameter on each
UmtsFddNeighbouringCell. Note that this parameter is only used when sib11NeighboringFddCellAlgo is set to
manual.

It is recommended to set sib11OrDchUsage to sib11AndDch for less than 96 neighboring cells (either GSM or
FDD) if UA07 feature 34291 “support of 64 UMTS neighbors” is activated (via isEnhancedSib11Allowed). Else,
it should be limited to 48 neighboring cells.
sib11OrDchUsage must be set to dchUsage for the other remaining neighboring cells.

HCS usage: HCS requires its related information elements to be added to sib-11 thus leading to a shrinkage of
the space available for neighbor data. When the cell flag isHcsUsed is set to TRUE, this feature can roughly
support up to 87 cells (serving cell + 31 FDD neighboring Intra + 32 FDD neighboring Inter + 23 I-RAT
neighboring cells) in the SIB11.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 15
Once the criteria for GSM or UTRAN/FDD neighboring cells tracking and measurements based on CPICH_Ec/No
are applied, a criteria S is applied on the measured GSM or FDD neighboring cells to assess their eligibility to cell
reselection.

To be eligible, the intra and inter-frequency FDD cells must fulfill criteria very similar to what is used for Cell
Selection. But this time these relationships shall be verified on the neighbor cell. This means the measurements
are made on this neighbor cell, and the parameters are those defined in the neighboring relationship.

To be eligible, the inter-system GSM cells must fulfill criteria shown in the above slide. Any cell (serving and any
GSM or UTRAN/FDD neighboring cell), which fulfills these criteria, will be part of the list of cells for ranking.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 16
High and low mobility UEs are distinguished thanks to the rate of Cell Reselection.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 17
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 18
With isHcsUsed set to False:
“Use of HCS” IE broadcasted in SIB11 is set to “Not used”.
Cell reselection is processed the same way as before UA05.0.
If sIntraSearch is not sent for the serving cell, the UE performs intra-frequency measurements.
If sInterSearch is not sent for the serving cell, the UE performs inter-frequency measurements.
If sSearchRatGsm is not sent for the serving cell, the UE performs measurements on GSM cells.
Note: If a negative value is data filled and sent in SIB3, the UE shall consider the value to be 0 (see
[3GPP_R04]).
Note: IE present in SIB3 is encoded as follows: sHcsRatGsm = (IE * 2) +1

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 19
The cell level ranking criterion is used to rank the cells prior to the reselection. When HCS is not used, the
behavior is the same as before UA5.0.
The serving cell and all the neighboring cells being eligible (S criteria) are ranked accordingly to the RL criteria, as
defined below:
RLs = Qmeas,s + Qhysts; for the serving cell
RLn = Qmeas,n - Qoffsets,n; for any GSM or UTRAN/FDD neighboring cells
Where Qmeas is the CPICH_RSCP for the FDD case. For GSM cells, RxLev is used instead of CPICH
RSCP in the mapping function.
Where Qhysts is the qHyst1 parameter of the CellSelectionInfo object.
Where Qoffset is the qOffset1sn parameter of the GSMCell object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 20
The cell quality ranking criterion is used to rank the cells prior to the reselection. When HCS is not used, the
behavior is the same as before UA5.0.
The serving cell and all the FDD neighboring cells being eligible (S criteria) are ranked accordingly to the RQ
criteria, as defined below:
RQs = Qmeas,s + Qhysts; for the serving cell
RQn = Qmeas,n - Qoffsets,n; for any UTRAN/FDD neighboring cells
Where Qmeas is the CPICH Ec/No measurement.
Where Qhysts is the qHyst2 parameter of the CellSelectionInfo object.
Where Qoffset is the qOffset2sn parameter of the UMTSFddNeighbouringCell object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 21
Then the cell reselection process is as follows:
If a GSM cell is ranked as the best cell, then the UE shall perform cell reselection to that GSM cell.
If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the qualMeas quality measure parameter for cell re-selection is
set to qualMeasRscp, then UE shall perform cell re-selection to that FDD cell.
If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the qualMeas quality measure parameter for cell re-selection is
set to qualMeasEcno, then UE shall perform a second ranking.
Note: That parameter was introduced in UA5.0 and was previously hard-coded to qualMeasEcno.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 22
Several scaling factors, introduced by 3GPP R5, can be applied to tReselection:
speedDependScalingFactorTReselection (used with or without HCS usage), between 0 and 1, in order to
speed up the reselection when High-Mobility state is detected.
interFreqScalingFactorTReselection between 1 and 4.75, in order to delay the reselection to Inter-
frequency neighboring cell.
interRatScalingFactorTReselection between 1 and 4.75, in order to delay the reselection to GSM
neighboring cell.
Note: All the parameters related to cell selection/reselection are broadcasted on the BCCH using either:
SIB3 for cell reselection parameters related to the serving cell.
SIB11 for cell reselection parameters related to the neighboring cells.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 23
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 24
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 25
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 26
HCS priorities are broadcasted in SIB3 for the serving cell and SIB11 for the neighboring cells.
3GPP assumes that a cell with hcsPrio = 7 has higher priority than another cell with hcsPrio = 0.
Actually, one shall consider HCS priority in conjunction with HMD and operator's strategy, as depicted in:
When high-mobility state is detected, the UE will try to reselect a cell with a lower HCS priority.
When high-mobility state is NOT detected, the UE will try to reselect a cell with higher HCS priority.
HCS rules regarding priorities and HMD are presented in the following pages.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 27
With isHcsUsed set to True, “Use of HCS” IE broadcasted in SIB11 is set to “Used”.
When HCS is used, measurement rules are based on the same thresholds as when HCS is not used
(sIntraSearch, sInterSearch, sSearchRatGsm, sSearchHcs and sHcsRatGsm) plus a new parameter
sLimitSearchRat which is broadcasted in SIB3.
When using HCS, the difference in the neighboring measurement rules relies on the filtering of the measured
cells based on high-mobility state detection.
When the UE is not in high-mobility state, measurements are triggered on higher priority neighboring cells.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 28
HCS introduces a new criterion, so-called Quality Level Threshold H criterion, which is used to determine
whether prioritized ranking according to hierarchical cell reselection shall apply.

Qmeas,s and Qmeas,n = CPICH_Ec/N0 or CPICH_RSCP for serving cell and FDD neighboring cells based on
qualMeas parameter.

Qmeas,n = BCCH_RSSI (or BCCH RxLev) for GSM neighboring cells.

Note: According to 3GPP 25.304, the real formula of Hn for a neighboring cell of hcsPrio n which is different from
hcsPrio s of the serving cell is

Hn = Qmeas,n – qHcs,n – temporaryOffset,n * W(t)

but Alcatel-Lucent recommends not to use temporaryOffset parameters.

So temporaryOffset,n is always set to 0.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 29
When the UE is in high-mobility state, measurements are triggered on lower priority neighboring cells.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 30
Like when HCS is not used, both Level and Quality Ranking criteria can be used depending on the setting of the

qualMeas parameter.

Note: According to 3GPP 25.304, the real formula of Rn for a neighboring cell of hcsPrio n equal to hcsPrio s of

the serving cell is

Rn = Qmeas,n – Qoffset s,n – temporaryOffset,n * W(t)

but Alcatel-Lucent recommends not to use temporaryOffset parameters.

So temporaryOffset,n is always set to 0.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 31
Once the H criterion has been computed for the serving cell and each neighboring cell, the UE performs ranking
of all cells that fulfill the S criterion, among:
when high-mobility state has NOT been detected (the higher priority, the smaller size):
All measured cells with the highest hcsPrio among the cells that fulfill H>=0
All measured cells, not considering hcsPrio levels, if no cell fulfills H>=0
When high-mobility state has been detected (the lower priority, the bigger size):
All measured cells with the highest hcsPrio that fulfill H>=0 and with a lower hcsPrio than the
serving cell
else:
All measured cells with the lowest hcsPrio that fulfill H>=0 and with a higher or equal hcsPrio
than the serving cell
else:
All measured cells without considering hcsPrio

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 32
Once the H criterion has been computed for the serving cell and each neighboring cell, the UE performs ranking
of all cells that fulfill the S criterion, among:
when high-mobility state has NOT been detected (the higher priority, the smaller size):
All measured cells with the highest hcsPrio among the cells that fulfill H>=0
All measured cells, not considering hcsPrio levels, if no cell fulfills H>=0
When high-mobility state has been detected (the lower priority, the bigger size):
All measured cells with the highest hcsPrio that fulfill H>=0 and with a lower hcsPrio than the
serving cell
else:
All measured cells with the lowest hcsPrio that fulfill H>=0 and with a higher or equal hcsPrio
than the serving cell
else:
All measured cells without considering hcsPrio

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 33
Let’s remind that the cell reselection process is as follows:
If a GSM cell is ranked as the best cell, then the UE shall perform cell reselection to that GSM cell.
If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the qualMeas quality measure parameter for cell re-selection
is set to qualMeasRscp, then UE shall perform cell re-selection to that FDD cell.
If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the qualMeas quality measure parameter for cell re-selection
is set to qualMeasEcno, then UE shall perform a second ranking.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 34
Several scaling factors, introduced by 3GPP R5, can be applied to tReselection:
speedDependScalingFactorTReselection (used with or without HCS usage), between 0 and 1, in order to
speed up the reselection when High-Mobility state is detected.
interFreqScalingFactorTReselection between 1 and 4.75, in order to delay the reselection to Inter-
frequency neighboring cell.
interRatScalingFactorTReselection between 1 and 4.75, in order to delay the reselection to GSM
neighboring cell.
Note: All the parameters related to cell selection/reselection are broadcasted on the BCCH using either:
SIB3 for cell reselection parameters related to the serving cell.
SIB11 for cell reselection parameters related to the neighboring cells.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 35
The Cell Reselection Control feature enables a more flexible cell reselection control from the network in a
Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS).
HCS layers management offers several solutions to manage the traffic demand and its associated noise rise.
For example, traffic may be split between the two or three layers in order to minimize the global noise rise, or it
may be split depending on the type of service used.
The later solution is conceivable if the microcell layer deployment aims at offering higher rate services
continuously within an area.
As a matter of fact, high data rate services require smaller cell sizes than low data rate services and therefore
may be continuously offered within an area only by the use of microcell sites (as illustrated on the above slide).
Moreover, since a microcell layer offer better indoor coverage quality than macro layers, this is well suited to high
data rate services, which are more likely to be indoor applications.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 36
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 37
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 38
Prior to UA06.0, Cell Selection and Reselection information was only broadcast to UE in SIB3/SIB11 whatever
mode (Idle, URA_PCH, Cell_PCH and Cell_FACH), SIB3 (resp. SIB11) containing serving cell information (resp.
neighboring cell).
UA06.0 introduced the support of SIB4/SIB12 in order to have different Cell Selection and Reselection setting
between Idle and connected modes (Cell_PCH, URA_PCH and Cell_FACH).
Enabling SIB4 and SIB12 has a direct impact on the System Information size since many information (especially
about neighboring cells) are duplicated.
When all scheduling information cannot be coded in one MIB segment, SB1 Scheduling Block (SB) is used to
support the exceeding segments, as defined per 3GPP. isDynamicSibAlgoWithSbAllowed allows the use of
such an SB1.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 39
Cell Selection Info (SIB 3 / 4 Mapping):

Idle Mode
Connected mode
Root = FddCell

CellSelectionInfo CellSelectionInfoConnectedMode

CellSelectionInfo. FachMeasOccasion CellSelectionInfoConnectedMode. FachMeasOccasion

CellSelectionInfo. CrMgt CellSelectionInfoConnectedMode. CrMgt

CellSelectionInfo. HcsCellParam CellSelectionInfoConnectedMode. HcsCellParam

No Equivalent CellSelectionInfoConnectedMode. CellSelectReselectInfoPchFach

CellAccessRestriction CellAccessRestrictionConnectedMode

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 40
Attributes for SIB4 HcsCellParam
CellSelectionInfoConnectedMode hcsPrio
interFreqScalingFactorTReselection qHcs
interRatScalingFactorTReselection sLimitSearchRat
qHyst1
qHyst2 FachMeasOccasion
qQualMin fachMeasOccasionCoef
qRxLevMin ratTypeList
qualMeas
sHcsRatGsm CrMgt
sInterSearch nCr
sIntraSearch
speedDependScalingFactor
sSearchHcs TReselection
sSearchRatGsm
tCrMax
tReselection
tCrMaxHyst
CellAccessRestrictionConnectedMode
CellSelectReselectInfoPchFach
accessClassBarred
accessClassCsBarred tReselectionPch
accessClassPsBarred tReselectionFach
barredOrNot qHyst1Pch
cellReservationExtension qHyst1Fach
cellReservedForOperatorUse qHyst2Pch
intraFreqCellReselectInd
qHyst2Fach
tBarred Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 41
Neighboring Info (SIB11 / SIB12 Mapping):

Idle Mode (Root = UmtsNeighbouringRelation) Connected mode

UmtsNeighbouringRelation. FddNeighCellSelectionInf
UmtsNeighbouringRelation
oConnectedMode

UmtsNeighbouringRelation. UMTSNeighbouringRelation.FddNeighCellSelectionIn
UmtsNeighbouringHcsCellParam foConnectedMode.UmtsNeighbouringHcsCellParam

UMTSNeighbouringRelation.FddNeighCellSelectionIn
UmtsNeighbouringRelation.
foConnectedMode.UmtsNeighbouringHcsTemporary
UmtsNeighbouringHcsTemporaryOffsets
Offset

Attributes for SIB12:


UmtsNeighbouringRelation FddNeighCellSelectionInfoConnectedMode
maxAllowedUlTxPower cellIndivOffset
neighbouringCellOffset maxAllowedUlTxPower
qOffset1sn qOffset1sn
qOffset2sn qOffset2sn
qOffsetMbms qQualMin
qQualMin qRxLevMin
qRxLevMin

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 42
UmtsNeighbouringRelation
maxAllowedUlTxPower
neighbouringCellOffset
qOffset1sn
qOffset2sn
qOffsetMbms
qQualMin
qRxLevMin

FddNeighCellSelectionInfoConnectedMode
cellIndivOffset
maxAllowedUlTxPower
qOffset1sn
qOffset2sn
qQualMin
qRxLevMin

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 43
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 44
Subsidiary Question:

Propose a solution to deactivate the inter-RAT mobility.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 45
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 46
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 47
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 48
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 49
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 50
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 51
In case of cell reselection from UTRA to E-UTRA
The reselection towards E-UTRA is based on information given in SIB19 to get:
Frequencies priority for all technologies GSM, UTRA and E-UTRA;
E-UTRA Frequencies in order to be able to detect E-UTRA cells.

In UA08.1, the following enhancements on the 3G-4G cell reselection framework is introduced: Support up to 8 E-
UTRA frequency & priority list in SIB19 (changed from 2 to 8).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 52
Utran Release UA07.1.2 provides the support of cell reselection from UMTS towards LTE. This applies to LTE
capable UEs in UTRA RRC IDLE, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH modes.
Cell reselection in Idle mode from UTRA to E-UTRA RRC idle
Cell reselection in CELL_PCH from UTRA to E-UTRA RRC idle
Cell reselection in URA-PCH from UTRA to E-UTRA RRC idle
It uses a new inter-RAT cell selection algorithm based upon “priority information”, as introduced by 3GPP in Rel.
8.
The priority algorithm allows one to additionally prioritize RAT in order to favor a system technology such as E-
UTRAN (Rel. 8 feature).
MS (non E-UTRAN capable) which does not support the “priority” algorithm shall use the legacy algorithm.
The network shall provide priority information if E-UTRA cells or frequencies are included within the neighbor cell
list.
The priority information (for E-UTRA and UTRA cells) as well as other parameters are broadcast to the UE in a
newly introduced SIB 19. A Rel. 8 UE will be able to detect itself E-UTRA cells but it will read SIB11/12 as usual
to identify FDD and GSM cells.

The following restrictions apply to SIB19 in UA08.1:


The IE Blacklisted cells per freq list is not supported.
The IE GSM priority info list is not supported.
The IE UTRAN FDD frequency priority is not supported.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 53
LTE Neighbouring Cells Parameters
There is no explicit configuration of each LTE neighboring cell. The LTE frequency and measurementBandwidth
are enough for the UE to detect by itself the E-UTRA cells.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 54
The measurement rules below apply in Idle, URA_PCH, CELL_PCH states. Reselection from Cell_FACH states
towards LTE is not yet supported by 3GPP.
Srxlev and Squal of the serving FDDCell are compared respectively with the parameters utraSPrioritySearch1
and utraSPrioritySearch2:
If SrxlevServingCell <= utraSPrioritySearch1
or
SqualServingCell <= utraSPrioritySearch2,
the UE shall perform measurements of inter-RAT layers of lower or higher priority.
If SrxlevServingCell > utraSPrioritySearch1
and
SqualServingCell > utraSPrioritySearch2,
the UE may choose not to perform measurements of inter-RAT layers of lower priority, the UE shall search
for E-UTRA layers of higher priority.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 55
If the priority of the E-UTRAN layer is higher than the current serving cell:
Cell reselection criterion: Srxlev[nonServingCell,x] of a cell on an evaluated higher absolute priority
layer is greater than Threshx,high during a time interval tReselection.

In this case the Target LTE Cell is selected regardless of the RxLev and quality level on the serving FDD cell.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 56
If the priority of the E-UTRAN layer is lower than the current serving cell
Cell reselection criterion: Srxlev[ServingCell] < Threshserving,low or Squal[ServingCell] < 0 and the
Srxlev[nonServingCell,x] of a cell on an evaluated lower absolute priority layer is greater than
Threshx,low during a time interval tReselection.

If more than one LTE cell meets the criteria, the UE shall reselect the cell with the highest SrxlevnonServingCell,x
among the cells meeting the criteria on the highest absolute priority layer.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 57
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 58
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 59
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 60
All UEs are members of one out of ten randomly allocated mobile populations defined as Access Classes 0 to 9.
The population number is stored in the SIM. In addition, mobiles may be members of one or more out of 5 special
categories (Access Classes 11 to 15) also held in the SIM and allocated to specific high priority users as follows
(enumeration is not meant as a priority sequence):
Class 15 - PLMN Staff (VIP)
Class 14 - Emergency Services
Class 13 - Public Utilities (for example, water/gas suppliers)
Class 12 - Security Services
Class 11 - For Operator Use
An additional control bit known as "Access Class 10" is also signaled over the air interface to the UE. This
indicates whether or not network access for Emergency Calls is allowed for UEs with access classes 0 to 9 or
without an IMSI.

Cell status and cell reservations are indicated with the Cell Access Restriction Information Element in the System
Information Message (SIB3) by means of four Information Elements:
Cell barred (IE type: "barred" or "not barred")
Cell Reserved for operator use (IE type: "reserved" or "not reserved")
Cell reserved for future extension (IE type: "reserved" or "not reserved")
Intra-frequency cell re-selection indicator (IE type: "allowed" or "not allowed")
The last element (Intra-frequency cell re-selection indicator) is conditioned by the value ”barred“ of the first
element (Cell barred)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 61
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 62
Location Area (LA)
The location area is used by the Core Network CS domain to determine the UE location in idle mode. A location
area contains a group of cells. Each cell belongs only to one LA.
The location area is identified in the PLMN by the Location Area Code (LAC), which corresponds to the
locationAreaCode parameter of the FDDCell object.
The Location Area Identifier (LAI) = PLMN-id + LAC = MCC + MNC + LAC
Routing Area (RA)
The routing area is used by the PS Core Network to determine the UE location in idle mode. A routing area
contains a group of cells. Each cell belongs only to one RA.
The routing area is identified by the Routing Area Code (RAC) within the LA. The RAC corresponds to the
routingAreaCode parameter of the FDDCell object.
A Routing Area Identifier (RAI) = LAI + RAC = MCC + MNC + LAC + RAC
Core Network Service Area (CN SA)
The CN SA is used by the Core Network to determine the UE location in connected mode. A service area
contains a group of cells. Each cell belongs only to one CN SA.
The service area is identified by the Service Area Code (SAC) within the LA. The SAC corresponds to the
serviceAreaCode parameter of the FDDCell object.
The Service Area Identifier (SAI) = LAI + SAC = MCC + MNC + LAC + SAC.
Broadcast Service Area (BC SA)
The BC SA is used by the Broadcast Center to schedule messages to be broadcast to UEs in the network.
The broadcast (BC) domain requires that BC SA consists of one cell.
locUpdatePeriod is Alcatel-Lucent name for 3GPP T3212 parameter.
It is also possible to configure a periodic Routing Area Update. This is possible through the 3GPP parameter
T3312. This parameter can be modified at SGSN Level.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 63
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.8 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 8 · Page 64
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 4
Page

1 SHO mobility requirements 7


1.1 Soft handover types 8
1.2 Periodic vs. full event triggered reporting 9
1.3 Periodical reports processing 10
1.4 Intra-freq CNL management 11
1.4.1 CNL computation type2 12
1.4.2 CNL computation type1 13
1.4.3 CNL computation - RAN model 14
1.5 Exercise 15
2 Active set management (Soft HO) 16
2.1 Relative add RL - event 1A 17
2.2 Detected set cells addition to active set 18
2.3 Relative delete RL - event 1B 19
2.4 Relative replace RL - event 1C 20
2.5 Event 1C improvement 21
2.6 Absolute add RL - event 1E 22
2.7 Absolute delete RL - event 1F 23
2.8 SHO blocking phase – RNC overload 24
2.8.1 Event storage 25
3 Primary cell change 26
3.1 Primary cell change: event 1D 27
3.2 Service based intra-freq mobility: RAN model 28
4 Intra-freq hard HO 29
4.1 Intra-freq inter-RNC mobility w/o Iur: HHO activation 30
4.2 RRC measurement control configuration 31
4.3 HHO detection after MeasId1: Iur link is down 32
4.4 HHO detection after MeasId16: Iur link is not provisioned 33
4.5 RAN model 34
5 SRNS relocation (UE not involved) 35
5.1 Principle 36
5.2 Parameters 37
5.2 Parameters 38

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 7
Soft Handover (SHO) applies only to dedicated physical channels and refers to the case where more than one
cell has a link established with a UE. In this mode, the UE is connected to a set of cells known as the Active Set,
where it benefits from macro diversity.
Softer Handover is a special case of SHO where the cells communicating with the UE belong to the same Node
B, thus it can only be performed intra-RNC. The particularity of the softer handover comes from the fact that the
radio links coming from different cells of the Node B are combined together at the Node B level before being sent
back to the RNC.
In the Intra-RNC SHO case, the cells involved in the soft handover procedure belong to different Node Bs that are
connected to the same Serving RNC (that is, the RNC in charge of the RRC connection with the mobile). Radio
Link recombination is performed at the S-RNC level.
In the Inter-RNC SHO case, the cells of the active set are not all controlled by the S-RNC. This is where the
notions of Drift and Serving RNC come into play:
S-RNC is in charge of the RRC connection with the mobile.
D-RNC controls the Node B that does not belong to the S-RNC and for which a radio link needs to be
established with the mobile.
An Iur link between S-RNC and D-RNC is required to perform inter-RNC SHO.
From S-RNC and UTRAN transport perspectives, D-RNC acts as a router.
From UE and Core Network perspectives, the presence of D-RNC is transparent, that is, soft handover
occurs as usual.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 8
From UA04.2, the mobility of a given UE is managed either in Periodical Mode or Full Event Triggered Mode.
The choice between these two modes is done by the RNC when the UE establishes a communication in
CELL_DCH state and is kept unchanged as long as the UE remains in CELL_DCH state. There is no switch
between Periodical Mode and Full Event Mode in CELL_DCH state, even when the Primary Radio Link is
changed.
In the event-triggered reporting mode, the type of the triggered event becomes the main indication to compute the
Mobility decisions. The semantic of the received event indicates which decision has to be taken. In this mode, the
RNC provides the UE, in the RRC Measurement Control, with the means to compute the criteria to manage the
Mobility. The RNC has to perform the related action indicated by the received event.
The isEventTriggeredMeasAllowed parameter controls the activation of the Full Event Triggered feature on a
per cell basis. The reporting mode for the call is the one configured on the cell where the call is established, and
is not changed during the call duration (on CELL_DCH).

Warning: not ALL UE support E6A and E6B: MeasControl Failure cause: „unsupported measurement“ shall be
sent by the UE but the call is kept

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 9
The above slide indicates in which order the various procedures are performed in the RNC when receiving a RRC
Measurement Report message from the mobile.
In this release, Alarm Hard Handover refers to the following mobility cases:
3G to 2G handover for CS
3G to 2G handover for PS
3G to 2G handover for CS + PS
3G to 3G inter-frequency inter-RNC handover
3G to 3G inter-frequency intra-RNC handover

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 10
Two different CNL algorithms are supported from UA06.0 that can be enabled/disabled using the
typeOfCompoundingNeighbourListIntraFreq parameter defined under the NeighbouringRnc and FDDCell
objects:
Prl stands for primary radio link and aims at disabling CNL at FDD cell level; the neighboring list only
consists in the primary cell neighborhood.
Type2 was the initial CNL algorithm introduced in UA04.1; the neighboring list classically consists in
concatenating Primary cell neighborhood then the best second leg’s … until
maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq is reached.
Type1 is the newly introduced algorithm which aims at building intrafrequency neighbouring list based on
priorities and occurrence.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 11
Basing the monitored set on the compound neighbor list rather than on the primary cell neighbors increases the
number of cells in the monitored set. So it is important to have a way to limit the size of the neighbor list, and
ensure that the monitored set comprises the best cells.
To achieve this, the algorithm consists in scanning the cells from the active set in decreasing order of CPICH
Ec/N0 and adding their neighbors to the monitored set, until the number of cells in the list reaches the maximum
size allowed.
A cell is not added in the compounding list if it is already included in this list, so as not to have several instances
of the same cell in the list.
If maxNbMonitoredCellForNonShoCompoundList is set to zero, the compound list is only composed of the
primary cell and its neighborhood.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 12
Type1 is the newly algorithm introduced in UA06.0 and is mainly based on:
neighbourCellPrio, between 0 and 62, defining for each FDD Cell a hierarchy within its neighborhood (0 is
the highest priority, 62 the lowest); note that two UMTSFddNeighbouringCell can NOT have the same
neighbourCellPrio.
“cells in active set” which are the cells from the ASET.
occurrence of each neighboring cell within the sponsoring cell neighborhood.
For each sponsoring cell, the RNC builds a neighboring cell list ordered by neighbourCellPrio. Then it builds the
final intra-frequency neighboring list by:
adding the sponsoring cells.
selecting the numOfPrimaryCellNeighbourIntraFreq first neighboring cells from Primary Cell neighboring
list.
and then performing the selection by number of occurrences.
In case of conflict, the RNC selects the neighboring cell whose sponsoring cell has the highest CPICH Ec/No,
then the one with the highest neighbourCellPrio until maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq is reached.
Iur case
In case a cell from the active set belongs to a Drift RNC, the Serving RNC may learn its intra-frequency
neighborhood using the information present in the RNSAP RadioLinkSetup/AdditionResponse message.
When type1 is selected, the RNC automatically assigns neighbourCellPrio by order of presence in the
RNSAP message (starting from 0).
It is recommended to set maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq to 32 to ensure that at least all cells of the
primary cell are sent. If maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq is 16 (for example) and the primary cell has 20
data filled neighbors, then only 16 neighbors will be sent to the UE.

If the detectedSetCellAddition flag is set to ENABLED or AUTOMATIC, then the


maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq parameter MUST be set to any value below 32. (31 is recommended).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 13
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 14
Type1 is the newly algorithm introduced in UA06.0 and is mainly based on:
neighbourCellPrio, between 0 and 62, defining for each FDD Cell a hierarchy within its neighborhood (0 is
the highest priority, 62 the lowest); note that two UMTSFddNeighbouringCell can NOT have the same
neighbourCellPrio.
“cells in active set” which are the cells from the ASET.
occurrence of each neighboring cell within the sponsoring cell neighborhood.
For each sponsoring cell, the RNC builds a neighboring cell list ordered by neighbourCellPrio. Then it builds the
final intra-frequency neighboring list by:
adding the sponsoring cells.
selecting the numOfPrimaryCellNeighbourIntraFreq first neighboring cells from Primary Cell neighboring
list.
and then performing the selection by number of occurrences.
In case of conflict, the RNC selects the neighboring cell whose sponsoring cell has the highest CPICH Ec/No,
then the one with the highest neighbourCellPrio until maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq is reached.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 15
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 16
Event 1A is triggered when a new P-CPICH enters the reporting range.
Event 1A is used to add an RL based on relative criteria when the Active Set is not full.
The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
MNew is the measurement result of the cell entering the reporting range.
CIONew is the individual cell offset for the cell entering the reporting range if an individual cell offset is stored
for that cell. Otherwise it is equal to 0.
Mi is a measurement result of a cell not forbidden to affect reporting range in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect reporting range in the current active set.
MBest is the measurement result of the cell not forbidden to affect reporting range in the active set with the
best measurement result, not taking into account any cell individual offset.
W is a parameter sent from UTRAN to UE.
R1a is the reporting range constant.
H1a is the hysteresis parameter for event 1A.

By default, event 1A is triggered by cells belonging to the monitored set.


In order to help the operator efficiently monitor its network and optimize its neighboring plan, it is possible to
trigger this event 1A based on both Detected Set and Monitored Set.
In order to achieve this, the isDetectedSetCellsAllowed parameter shall be set to True.
From UA7 onwards, the decision if the cells from Detected Set are used in the mobility algorithms
depends on the detectedSetCellAddition flag (see next slide).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 17
From UA7 onwards, if the detectedSetCellAddition flag is set to ENABLED or AUTOMATIC, then the cells from
the Detected Set can be added to the Active Set.

If the combined intra frequency Cell Info List exceeds its maximum list size
maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq then cells with lower ranking priority need to be cut off from the list
which in consequence does no more represent the complete neighborhood of the active set.
The cells having been cut off may reappear as detected set cells reported by the UE and will be re-identified
by the RNC. Those cells will no longer be ignored but be eligible to be added to the active set.
This is applicable when compounding algorithm Type1 is activated. Type2 does not support detected set cell
addition in the active set.
Compounding Neighboring List algorithm (typeOfCompoundingNeighbourListIntraFreq) must be
set to “Type1”
maxCompoundingListSizeIntraFreq MUST be set to any value strictly below 32.

If the detectedSetCellAddition flag is set to DISABLED the cells from Detected Set will not be used in the
mobility algorithms.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 18
Event 1B is triggered when an active P-CPICH leaves the reporting range.
Event 1B is used to delete an RL based on relative criteria.

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:


MOld is the measurement result of the cell leaving the reporting range.
CIONew is the individual cell offset for the cell entering the reporting range if an individual cell offset is stored
for that cell. Otherwise it is equal to 0.
Mi is a measurement result of a cell not forbidden to affect reporting range in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect reporting range in the current active set.
MBest is the measurement result of the cell not forbidden to affect reporting range in the active set with the
best measurement result, not taking into account any cell individual offset.
W is a parameter sent from UTRAN to UE.
R1b is the reporting range constant.
H1b is the hysteresis parameter for the event 1B.

Note: The above drawing shows an example assuming that CIO is set to 0 dB.
R’99/R4 UEs are not able to use periodical measurement reporting after initial report.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 19
Event 1C is triggered when a new P-CPICH becomes better than an active P-CPICH.
Event 1C is used to replace an RL based on relative criteria when the Active Set is full.

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:


MNew is the measurement result of the cell not included in the active set.
CIO New is the individual cell offset for the cell becoming better than the cell in the active set if an individual
cell offset is stored for that cell. Otherwise it is equal to 0.
M In AS is the measurement result of the cell in the active set with the lowest measurement result.
CIO In AS is the individual cell offset for the cell in the active set that is becoming worse than the new cell.
H1c is the hysteresis parameter for the event 1C.

Note: The above drawing shows an example assuming that the maximum AS size is set to 2 and that all the
CIOs are set to 0 dB.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 20
From UA7 onwards, if the isEnhanced1cHandlingAllowed flag is set to TRUE, the RNC will determine if the
pilot of any non-active cell to be added to the active set is weaker than the computed minimum signal strength (=
pilot strength of the strongest cell of the active set - cpichEcNoReportingRange1B)
If it is weaker, the candidate cell will not be added to the active set. A non-active cell will only be added if the
reported CPICH EcNo plus the Cell Individual Offset (CIO) is greater than threshold:

CPICH EcNo(NA_x) + CIO (NA_x) > CPICH EcNo (A1) - R1b

Where:
A1 = strongest active set cell
NA_x = non-active cell under consideration
R1b = cpichEcNoReportingRange1B

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 21
Event 1E is triggered when a new P-CPICH becomes better than an absolute threshold.
Event 1E is used to add an RL based on absolute criteria when the Active Set is not full.

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:


MNew is the measurement result of a cell that becomes better than an absolute threshold.
CIONew is the individual cell offset for the cell becoming better than the absolute threshold. Otherwise it is
equal to 0.
T1e is an absolute threshold.
H1e is the hysteresis parameter for the event 1E.

In order to help the operator efficiently monitor its network and optimize its neighboring plan, it is possible to
trigger this event 1E based on both Detected Set and Monitored Set. However the cells from the Detected Set will
not be used in the mobility algorithms.
In order to achieve this, the isDetectedSetCellsAllowed parameter shall be set to True.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 22
Event 1F is triggered when an active P-CPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold.
Event 1F is used to delete an RL based on absolute criteria.

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:


MOld is the measurement result of a cell that becomes worse than an absolute threshold.
CIOOld is the individual cell offset for the cell becoming worse than the absolute threshold. Otherwise it is
equal to 0.
T1f is an absolute threshold.
H1f is the hysteresis parameter for the event 1F.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 23
An SHO procedure may block other procedures or may be blocked by ongoing procedures.

On the one hand, a blocking phase consists in forbidding any procedure until an SHO procedure is completed, i.e.
after the RNC receives RRC ActiveSetUpdateComplete from the UE.

The shoAfterBlockingPhaseEnable parameter allows one to activate a mechanism to process events during
such a blocking phase:
When set to True, all the events received during the blocking phase are stored in a stack and processed
once on-going procedure is completed, thus preventing abusive call drops in case of unexpected add/delete.
When set to False, all these events are discarded, thus inhibiting mobility and degrading performances.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 24
The RNC processes only the last event 1A, 1C, 1D, 1E or 1J received during the blocking phase. Appropriate
action is taken just after the completion of the other procedure. However, the RNC processes all events 1F
received during the blocking phase.
A specific handling has been provided for event 1B in order to adapt the RNC reaction to different UE behaviors.
If several events 1B have been received from the same UE during a blocking phase, the events related to a
continuous trigger condition (received from a UE with release later than R’99) or the successive single samples
representing different trigger conditions (received from a R’99 UE) will be repeated by the UE.
In order to avoid any loss of information on radio links to be deleted, the RNC should keep the received events
until the other procedure is completed; but queuing of all repeated events may lead to handling of outdated
measured results. They will be reactivated and processed sequentially when the blocking phase is terminated. If
event 1A or 1C was stored in parallel then event 1B will be processed first.
However, in order to enhance the handling of event 1B by keeping only the last event 1B when multiple events 1B
are received in the blocking phase, the handling of event 1B received from a UE later than R’99 depends on the
isOne1bStorageAllowed flag as follows:
If the isOne1bStorageAllowed flag is set to TRUE, only the last event 1B received during a blocking phase
will be stored. It will be reactivated on completion of the other procedure. Compared to the behavior defined
above for R’99 UEs, the processing will be in reverse order so that event 1B will be processed after event 1A
or 1C if stored in parallel (in order to avoid a call drop if event B corresponds to a last RL).
If the isOne1bStorageAllowed flag is set to FALSE, then the same behavior as defined above for R’99 UEs
will apply.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 25
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 26
The 1D event can be triggered by a cell in the Active Set for R5/R6 UEs or by a cell in the Active Set or in the
Monitored Set for R'99/R4 UEs.

The primary cell determination is based on event 1D reception. Based on the reception of this event, the RNC
stores the new primary, and applies the current process used in case of change of primary cell.
Since events 1A and 1C are also configured, it is assumed that the new primary cell is already in the Active Set
when a 1D event is triggered. Typically, this will be ensured if the time to trigger 1D is greater than or equal to the
time to trigger events 1A or 1C. It should be noted that a monitored set cell that needs to be included in the active
set will trigger first a 1A event if its CPICH Ec/No is lower than the best cell in the Active set but entering in its
reporting range, or a 1C event if the Active Set is full and this cell is better than the worst in the Active Set.
An event 1D will typically be triggered by a cell better than the best in the active set. Therefore due to the
triggering conditions defined for these events, if the time to trigger a 1D event is greater than or equal to that for a
1A and 1C event, the 1D will typically be triggered by a cell in the active set.
If the event 1D is triggered by a monitored cell, the RL will be added in the Active Set if not full.
If the Active Set is full and the 1D event is triggered by a monitored set cell, then the new best cell will be added
in the active set, replacing the worst active set cell.
In addition to the event 1D, a new primary cell will be defined if the current primary cell is removed due to
reception of RL deletion events.

Event 1D is not repeated by UE and therefore if lost during SRNS relocation it cannot be recovered. It is only
another event 1D for a different cell that will fix the issue of wrong primary cell. This is particularly bad for HSDPA
calls which follow the primary cell and do support SHO.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 27
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 28
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 29
Intra-frequency Inter-RNC mobility without Iur may occur in the following situations:
Two different operators (PLMN) using the same frequency in the same area
National roaming agreements are needed
In a single PLMN, no Iur provisioned between 2 RNCs
E.g. due to IOT reasons between 2 different RNC manufacturers
In a single PLMN, the Iur interface is provisioned but is not in an enabled state.
Need to handle Intra-frequency Inter-RNC HHO
FRS 21302 was initially implemented in UA4.3K timeframe
FRS 33422 was duplicated for UA05.0
Code was implemented but commercially not supported
Not applicable to HSxPA calls
FRS 33814 has been created for UA06.0
Feature is fully supported
Also applicable to HSxPA calls

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 30
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 31
MR for MeasId1 (Event 1A)
UE reports MeasId1(E1A) in case SHO RL addition conditions are met
Triggering cells may belong to SRNC or DRNC when Iur is provisioned

Several conditions must be fulfilled for SRNC to detect HHO


The triggering cell belongs to DRNC but SRNC detects an Iur outage
The following flags are set to True
isIntraFreqInterRncHHOAllowed
isIntraFreqInterRncHhoOnIurLinkDownAllowed
isHsdpaHhoWithMeasAllowed for HSDPA calls
isEdchHhoWithMeasAllowed for E-DCH calls
The triggering cell i is reported better than the best one in the ASET

EcNo i + CIO i > EcNo best_ASET + CIO best_ASET


The triggering cell i respects the following condition:
(EcNo i >= minimumCpichEcNoValueForHho) AND (Rscp i >= minimumCpichRscpValueForHho)
Beware to confusion with minimumCpichEcNoValueForHO / minimumCpichRscpValueForHO dealing
with inter-frequency HHO
In case several cells fulfill these 2 conditions, HHO is triggered towards the cell with highest EcNo + CIO

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 32
MR for MeasId16 (Event 1A)
UE reports MeasId16(E1A) in case Intra-frequency HHO conditions are met
Triggering cells must belong to another RNC when Iur is NOT provisioned

Several conditions must be fulfilled for SRNC to detect HHO


The triggering cell can NOT be added in the ASET as Iur is NOT provisioned
The following flags are set to True
isIntraFreqInterRncHHOAllowed
isHsdpaHhoWithMeasAllowed for HSDPA calls
isEdchHhoWithMeasAllowed for E-DCH calls
The triggering cell i is reported better than the best one in the ASET
EcNo i + CIO i > EcNo best_ASET + CIO best_ASET
The triggering cell i respects the following condition:
(EcNo i >= minimumCpichEcNoValueForHho) AND (Rscp i >= minimumCpichRscpValueForHho)
Beware to confusion with minimumCpichEcNoValueForHO / minimumCpichRscpValueForHO dealing with
inter-frequency HHO
In case several cells fulfill these 2 conditions, HHO is triggered towards the cell with highest EcNo + CIO

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 33
FullEventHOConfHhoMgt
FullEventRepCritEvent1AWithoutIur

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 34
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 35
The SRNS Relocation procedure is used to move the RAN to CN connection point at the RNC from the source
SRNC to the target RNC. As a result of this procedure:
The Iu links are relocated from the Source RNC (S-RNC) to the Target RNC (T-RNC).
The target RNC becomes the SRNC.
The source RNC is released from the call.
The figure shows a PS domain SRNS relocation example where the S-SRNC and T-SRNC are connected to
different SGSNs (i.e. inter-SGSN Relocation).
Before the SRNS Relocation procedure, the UE is registered in the old SGSN. The source RNC is acting as
the serving RNC (SRNC).
After the SRNS Relocation procedure, the target RNC is acting as the serving RNC.
The SRNS Relocation (UE not involved) is triggered when there are no links in the active set on the Source
RNC and all remaining links in the active set are on a single DRNC.
The SRNS relocation procedure implemented in Alcatel-Lucent UA05 UTRAN release is called Iur-based SRNS
relocation to differentiate it from the other variants of SRNS relocation defined by 3GPP 23.009.
The key benefits associated with Iur-SRNS relocation are as follows:
Reduction in the delay associated with the routing of the user plane flow via the Iur interface.
Capacity gain at RNC and Iur interface due to saving of Iur transmission resources
QoS improvement: better RRM, less inter-RNC HHO

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 36
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 37
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.9 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 9 · Page 38
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 4
Page

1 HHO mobility requirements 7


1.1 Hard handover types 8
2 Intelligent Multi-Carrier Traffic Allocation 9
2.1 Principle 10
2.2 Strategy 11
2.3 Generic iMCTA algorithm 12
2.4 iMCTA triggering 15
2.5 iMCTA alarm triggering 16
2.6 iMCTA alarm validity checking 18
2.7 iMCTA service validity checking 20
2.8 Cell load criteria on iMCTA 21
2.9 iMCTA configuration retrieval 23
2.10 Blind handover 26
2.11 Neighboring cells searching and filtering 32
2.12 Measurement configuration 38
2.13 Measurement report processing 39
2.14 HHO decision 53
2.15 iMCTA fallback 54
2.16 RAN model 55
2.17 Exercise 1 59
2.18 Exercise 2 60
2.19 Exercise 3 61
2.20 Exercise 4 63
3 Inter-FDD/inter-RAT HHO 65
3.1 3G to 2G HHO 66
3.2 CS 3G to 2G HHO failure: next best cell attempt 67
3.3 3G to 3G intra-RNC inter-freq HHO 68
3.4 3G to 3G inter-RNC inter-freq HHO: Iur not used 69
3.5 3G to 3G inter-RNC inter-freq HHO: Iur used 70
4 4G to 3G inter-RAT HHO 71
4.1 LTE/UMTS mobility in UA08 72
4.2 RAT mobility events 73
4.3 Partial relocation of RABs 75
4.4 CS fallback procedure 77
4.5 RAN model 78
4.5 RAN model 79

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 5
Page

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 7
Hard Handover gathers a set of handover procedures where all the old radio links are abandoned before the new
radio links are established (break before make).
Hard handovers are needed as soon as the UE needs to leave its serving UMTS carrier. It could be:
When the Iur interface is not present and the UE is changing RNC.
When moving to another UMTS carrier (inter / intra-RNC or inter / intra-PLMN): this case is defined as the
inter-frequency HHO.
When moving to another mode (e.g. TDD).
When moving to another technology (GSM, GPRS): this case is defined as the inter-RAT HHO.
When moving to UMTS from another technology (GSM, GPRS, LTE): this case is defined as incoming
relocation HHO.
When Soft Handover is not permitted (due to OAM constraint).

The following hard handover procedures are supported:


3G to 2G Hard Handover
3G to 3G Inter-frequency Inter-RNC HHO algorithm
3G to 3G Inter-frequency Intra-RNC HHO algorithm
3G to 3G Intra-frequency Inter-RNC HHO algorithm
2G to 3G Hard Handover
4G to 3G Hard Handover

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 8
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 9
Intelligent Multi-Carrier Traffic Allocation (iMCTA) allows the handover of a UE to another layer when in
Cell_DCH connected mode:
In case of coverage gap (iMCTA Alarm).
In case of RAB establishment failure. If call establishment is not possible because Call Admission Control
(CAC) fails establishing the traffic RAB (TRB) (iMCTA CAC).
After Service Type change, Intra-frequency mobility or Always-on upsize based on load condition of
source/target cells, call type and UE/Cell capabilities (iMCTA Service).

iMCTA Alarm cannot be disabled as the objective is to save the call in case coverage is being lost. CAC and
Service can be enabled/disabled through WMS (OMC) parameters. The recommended setting is to have iMCTA
Alarm and CAC enabled in order to improve Accessibility and Retainability.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 10
The iMCTA algorithm manages HHO handovers which may be triggered for several reasons:
save the call in case of loss of coverage: iMCTA triggered on HHO Alarm (case 1).
manage to establish a RAB that has experienced a CAC failure: iMCTA triggered on CAC failure (case 2).
optimize throughput by redirecting CS and PS calls to a preferred layer:
In case of a user service establishment or modification: iMCTA triggered on User Service (case 3).
In case of Primary Cell change: iMCTA triggered on Mobility Service (case 4).
For any iMCTA trigger cause, a load balancing can be applied in order to improve the overall network quality and
capacity:
For iMTCA triggers on User Service or Mobility Service:
Serving cell load can be checked to enable or disable the user redirection.
Target cell load can be checked to favor less loaded eligible cells.
For iMTCA triggers on HHO alarm or CAC failure:
Serving cell load is not checked.
Target cell load can be checked to filter out high loaded cell or favor less loaded eligible cells.
The iMCTA function only applies to call in connected mode (Cell DCH, E-DCH and HS-DSCH).
Call in Cell FACH (signaling or traffic), Cell PCH or URA PCH are not managed.

In UA08, 12 FDD carriers + 1 GSM carrier + 2 LTE carriers are supported.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 11
iMCTA is composed of 9 different functions that are processed sequentially:
1. Invoking iMCTA upon 3 call processing events:
Alarm trigger
CAC failure trigger
User or Mobility Service trigger
2. iMCTA validity checking
To decide whether iMCTA must be processed or not (checking activation parameters and identifying the
Service Type and RAB to be set); In UA08.1, iMCTA supports a direct DCH transition to another layer
after an AO upsize trigger for Service and CAC, introduce the ability to use HSPA load criteria instead of
DCH Load Criteria for HSPA calls, and introduce the load color BLACK for DCH.
3. iMCTA configuration retrieval
To select the right Priority table (priority is a key parameter for iMCTA and is defined per carrier and per
service type); In UA08.1, the priority list processing includes the AO upsize trigger for CAC and Service
and the support of 12 FDD carriers for Alarm, CAC and Service priority tables.
4. Blind HO processing
Introduction in UA08.1. If applicable, this function will run prior to the neighboring cell searching and
filtering for Radio Access Selection for Measurement based HO; Blind HHO execution (no
measurements configured) and iMCTA Alarm or CAC fallback if Blind HO fails or continue with
neighboring cell searching and filtering for Radio Access Selection for Measurement based HO if enabled
and if not eligible cell retrieved for blind HO.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 12
5. Neighboring cell searching and filtering
For Radio Access Selection (FDD and/or GSM) based on neighboring cell and priority tables to select a
Radio Access Technology (RAT); In UA08.1 iMCTA introduces the ability to use HSPA load criteria
instead of DCH Load Criteria for HSPA calls, and introduces the load color BLACK for DCH. It also
introduces improvements for the limitation to two W-CDMA FDD carriers for inter-frequency radio
measurement. Ability to pre-check for inter-Frequency measurements to avoid triggering measurements
for FDD overloaded access layers is conserved.
6. Configuration of the compressed mode and of the UE measurements
To provide Node B and UE with complete measurement information (Compressed Mode and neighboring
cell list corresponding to the selected RAT; simultaneous compressed mode supported).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 13
7. Measurement report processing
To process all RRC Measurement Report messages sent by the UE. In UA07, filter out the loaded cells
for Alarm & CAC. In UA08.1, iMCTA introduces a synchronization mechanism to wait for the favored
carrier (FDD or GSM) measurement report and new configuration for EcNo and RSCP Target Cell
Threshold.
8. iMCTA HHO execution or iMCTA exit
In UA08.1, iMCTA Alarm or CAC fallback if Measurement based HO fails.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 14
There are 3 types of iMCTA invocations:
HHO Alarm trigger: iMCTA is called on any HHO alarm measurement whether Periodic Mode or Full Event
Triggered Mode is used.
CAC failure trigger: it covers all causes of CAC:
From Cell: no radio resource available
From Iub, Iur: Radio Link Reconfiguration Failure
From Iub, Iur, Iu: Transport Bearer failure
From S-RNC: user plane resource allocation failure
Service trigger:
iMCTA service aims at redirecting the UE to a more appropriate layer (either UMTS or GSM) in order
to improve:
the quality of service provided to this user (e.g. by redirecting an HSUPA-capable UE to an
HSUPA-capable cell)
the usage of UTRAN resources (e.g. by redirecting a UE from a “Red” cell to a “Green” one)
iMCTA service is invoked after the RNC has sent RANAP RAB Assignment Response or Iu Release
Complete to CN, i.e. after RAB is established or released. Therefore, call establishment KPIs are not
impacted by iMCTA Service.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 15
The algorithm used to trigger alarm measurements while in Full Event mode is based on the following principles:
On reception of an event 2D (alarm condition), the RNC starts the timer timerAlarmHoEvent2D.
If, at expiry of the timerAlarmHoEvent2D, no event 2F (indicating that the alarm conditions are no more
met) has been received, the alarm condition is confirmed, and iMCTA Alarm is invoked.
At the opposite, if an event 2F is received while the timer is still running, the timer is stopped, and the alarm
conditions are invalidated. iMCTA Alarm is not invoked.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 16
Prior to UA07, alarm HHO was triggered by the RNC upon reception of event 2D thus only dependent on the DL
Radio quality.

UA07.1 onwards:
UL UE Tx Power can be taken into account to evaluate the radio quality and trigger the Alarm HHO.
The Feature is activated by isAlarmHhoUeTxPwrAllowed.
Benefit: avoid dropped calls when UE TX power is insufficient.
When the UE TX Power reported by the UE is above a threshold, an “alarm” Hard Handover (inter-frequency
or inter-system) is triggered in order to rescue the call on another carrier.
The actual Handover then follows the same procedures as for the Ec/No and RSCP triggers. The RNC will
configure an uplink trigger as new Alarm HHO criteria by using the internal measurements Events 6A/6B:
6A: The UE Tx power exceeds an absolute threshold.
6B: The UE Tx power falls below an absolute threshold.
A Alarm HHO uplink criterion is hit when the RNC received an Event 6A AND the alarm confirmation timer
elapses without receipt of Event 6B.
If, at expiry of the timerAlarmHoEvent6A, no event 6B (indicating that the alarm uplink conditions are no
more met) has been received, the alarm condition is confirmed, and IMCTA Alarm is invoked.
At the opposite, if an event 6B is received while the timer is still running, the timer is stopped, and the alarm
conditions are invalidated. iMCTA Alarm is not invoked.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 17
Once iMCTA trigger has been identified, Validity Checking aims at determining whether this specific iMCTA
trigger is enabled on the Primary cell, through the mode parameter that can have 4 different values:
AlarmOnly to have only iMCTA Alarm enabled
AlarmAndCac to have iMCTA Alarm and iMCTA CAC enabled
AlarmAndService to have iMCTA Alarm and iMCTA Service enabled
All to have all iMCTA triggers enabled
The mode parameter must be set at primary cell level, i.e.:
at FDD cell level when primary cell C-RNC is the Serving RNC, through the
FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation object (so-called FddImcta).
at Neighbouring RNC level when primary cell C-RNC is a Drift RNC, through the
NeighbouringRNCIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation object (so-called NeighbouringRncFddImcta).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 18
iMCTA Service can only be processed when the Primary cell is located on the Serving RNC:
Therefore, iMCTA Service can only be activated on the FddImcta object.
mode must be never be set to AlarmAndService or All on the NeighbouringRncImcta object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 19
When the userServiceSigToTrafficOnlyEnable parameter is set to True, iMCTA User Service is only
processed consecutively to the establishment of the very first RAB, i.e. after transition from standalone SRB
(DCH 3.4 or 13.6 kbps) to SRB+TRB (either CS or PS).
Therefore, this parameter allows one to limit the number of iMCTA User Service occurrences.
The mobilityServiceForHsxpaEnable parameter activates/deactivates the triggering of iMCTA Service when an
HSxPA-capable mobile performs Primary cell change.
The mobilityServiceForNonHsxpaEnable parameter activates/deactivates the triggering of iMCTA Service
when a non HSxPA-capable mobile performs Primary cell change.

“iMCTA on AO upsize” Enhancement:


This sub-feature adds iMCTA direct DCH transition support on AO upsize, i.e. on state change from
URA/Cell_PCH or Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH. In this release, only FDD twin cell targets are considered.
Sub-feature “iMCTA on AO upsize” is enabled if:
RadioAccessService/isImctaOnAoUpsize = TRUE, AND
FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation/isImctaOnAoUpsize = TRUE

iMCTA Service on AO upsize with direct DCH transition applies upon:


AO upsize from Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH due to traffic reasons.
AO upsize from URA/Cell_PCH to Cell_DCH due to traffic increase or Cell Update procedure decides to
perform an AO upsize from URA/Cell_PCH to Cell_DCH due to new RAB assignments.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 20
The cell load information is needed for iMCTA to state whether the Primary cell is eligible or not to iMCTA Service.
Comparing Primary cell iMCTA color with originatingCellColourThreshold is systematically performed by
iMCTA Service, for load balancing purposes but also for traffic segmentation (which is based on UE and NodeB
HSxPA capabilities). If operator’s priority is to perform traffic segmentation rather than load balancing,
originatingCellColourThreshold must be set to Green so as to systematically go further in the algorithm,
whatever Primary cell load.

Consequently, in UA05, it was impossible to have Load Balancing and Service Segmentation fully coexisting
because the former needs to have HHO only triggered when the cell is loaded whereas the latter needs to have
HHO triggered whatever cell load.
In UA06.0, such limitation was removed thanks to the introduction of isServiceSegmentationTopPriority, a new
flag defined per serviceType, which allows to bypass originatingCellColourThreshold during iMCTA Validity
checking, as presented hereafter.

NAMING CONVENTIONS
Cell fully compatible with UE capabilities
HSUPA cell and HSUPA UE
HSDPA cell and HSDPA UE
R’99 cell and R’99 UE
Cell partially compatible with UE capabilities
HSUPA (resp. HSDPA) cell and HSDPA (resp. HSUPA) UE
Cell NOT compatible with UE capabilities
HSxPA cell and R’99 UE
R’99 cell and HSxPA UE

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 21
Rational: Feature UA07.1.2 81213 Load Balancing Between HSPA Carriers introduced a new HSDPA downlink
load criterion in order to manage load balancing of HSPA I/B traffic with or without MinBR (DL HSPA Load =
maximum (HSPA DL Power Colour, HSPA DL Codes Colour)); however, in UA07.1.2 it applies to IMCRA only.
“iMCTA to use HSPA load” Enhancement: this sub-feature introduces the HSPA load indicator usage for
iMCTA use. In parallel, load threshold parameters used by iMCTA have been enhanced with the new load color
“black”.
“iMCTA to use HSPA load” is enabled if:
RadioAccessService/isImctaUseHspaLoad = TRUE
isHspaCellLoadAllowedForImcra= TRUE & isHsxpaR99ResourcesSharingOnCellAllowed= TRUE
(PM81213);
Otherwise, iMCTA will use the aggregate DCH load.

In such case:
HSPA I/B calls will address the HSPA load criterion (DL HSPA Load = maximum (HSPA DL Power Color,
HSPA DL Codes Color)).
For DCH and HSPA GBR calls, the existing DCH load criterion is used further on.
For multi RAB calls (CS on DCH and PS on HSPA, or HSPA GBR and HSPA I/B), the RNC shall use the
maximum load color of DCH and HSPA load.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 22
Once it has been checked that the invoked iMCTA trigger is enabled for the Primary cell, iMCTA Configuration Retrieval aims
at selecting the Priority Table to be used.
Priority Table is an important concept in iMCTA which must be associated with ServiceType (ST) and Priority.
An iMCTA Priority table defines for a specific iMCTA Trigger (Alarm, CAC or Service) and for each ST a priority level to be
applied on the different FDD and GSM neighboring cells.
When iMCTA Alarm is triggered, the algorithm retrieves the AlarmPriorityTable that is pointed either by FddImcta or
NeighbouringRncImcta object, depending on the Primary cell location.
From UA08 onwards, iMCTA Alarm & iMCTA CAC & iMCTA Service priority Tables are extended to contain 12 FDD
Frequencies.
Since iMCTA Service can only been triggered when Primary cell is located on the Serving RNC, the algorithm can retrieve up
to 3 Priority tables that are pointed by the FddImcta object:
ServicePriorityGeneralTable
ServicePriorityTableForHsdpa (optional object)
ServicePriorityTableForHsupa (optional object)
The selection of the right Service Priority Table is based on UE’s HSxPA-capabilities sent in the RRC Connection Setup
Complete message:
If UE is HSUPA-capable ServicePriorityTableForHsupa is retrieved if present
Otherwise ServicePriorityTableForHsdpa if present
Otherwise ServicePriorityGeneralTable
If UE is HSDPA-capable ServicePriorityTableForHsdpa is retrieved if present
Otherwise ServicePriorityGeneralTable
If UE is not HSDPA-capable nor HSUPA-capable ServicePriorityGeneralTable is retrieved
Unlike as for iMCTA Alarm and CAC, for iMCTA Service typically GSM and FDD access types should have different priority
because the Service trigger is not needed to save the call but to assign a better layer. Nevertheless, it is possible to
assign the same priority for GSM and FDD if desired.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 23
The originatingCellColourThreshold parameter can be configured per Service Type (ST). iMCTA
Alarm, CAC and Service Priority Tables are extended to contain 12 FDD Frequencies and 12 ConfClass:
New Object OriginatingCellColourThresholdConfClass 0..11;
New Object OriginatingCellColourThresholdPerService 0…11;
Updated Object Frequency 1..14 (FDD1-12; 2G; OtherFDD);
In UA08, AlarmPriorityTable may be composed of 12 FDD frequencies plus one input for 2G.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 24
The Service Handover option allows CS and PS Core Networks to inform UTRAN that GSM is preferred for this
service, through the optional ServiceHo Information Element (IE) which is present in RANAP RAB Assignment
Request messages:
Based on the 3 different values that ServiceHo IE can have (if present), the iMCTA algorithm may
dynamically change the GSM priority in the Priority table:
IE = should: GSM priority is overwritten with P0, i.e. GSM becomes the most preferred target Access.
IE = should not: GSM priority is overwritten with P6, i.e. GSM becomes the less preferred target
Access.
IE = shall not: GSM priority is overwritten with PNA, i.e. GSM is no more eligible to target Access.
The processing of this optional IE is not systematic and can be enabled/disabled through
serviceHoRanapIeEnable parameter.
“should not” is never taken into account when iMCTA Alarm or iMCTA CAC are triggered.

isChangeGsmIratHoCriterionAllowed enables/disables the change of the Service Handover criterion of CS


voice calls for UMTS to GSM handover from 'should' to 'should not' if the UE is involved in a simultaneous PS
call.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 25
In UA08, iMCTA may apply measurement-based handover, also known as Mobile Assisted HO (MAHO) or Blind
HO, also known as Database Assisted HO (DAHO). If no Twin cell is eligible for Blind HO, then iMCTA continues
with “Measurement based HO” if enabled.
“Blind HO” applies to:
AO upsize CAC & Service trigger (Cell/URA_PCH or Cell_FACH to Cell_DCH)
only Blind HO is enabled for AO upsize trigger, because there is no available measurement.
for AO upsize trigger, Blind HO is enabled independent of parameters RadioAccessService/
isImctaBlindHo, FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation/blindHoType, and
FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation/blindHoMode.
iMCTA Alarm, iMCTA CAC or iMCTA Service depending on configuration for parameter
FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation/blindHoMode (alarm, AlarmCac, AlarmService, Cac, cacService,
service, all) and only if the following criteria are met:
Primary cell is on SRNC (if the primary cell is on DRNC then only MAHO is applicable), AND
RadioAccessService/isImctaBlindHo is true, AND
FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation/blindHoType is “allowOnlyBho” or “minLevPrlBho” and
primary link level is equal to or above the configured FddIntelligentMultiCarrierTrafficAllocation
/minLevPrlBho

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 26
Blind HO is processed in reference to a specific and parallel Twin cell list as did for RRC Re-direction while
Measurement based HO is in reference to the neighboring list.

Note: GSM twin list is new in UA08 whereas FDD twin list already existed in UA07.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 27
Process filter based on priority tables: Similar as for neighbor cells a Twin cell is only considered if the
frequency is selected via the iMCTA priority table.

Process Load Based Target cell filtering: Since Measurement report processing does not apply for Blind HO,
the initial iMCTA phase for neighboring cell searching reuses some Measurement report processing concepts for
Twin Cells.

Process Target Twin Cell and RAT Selection: A single FDD Twin cell or GSM cell should be selected for Blind
HO.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 28
* Cell fully compatible with UE capabilities
HSUPA cell and HSUPA UE
HSDPA or HSUPA cell and HSDPA UE
R’99 cell and R’99 UE

* Cell partially compatible with UE capabilities


HSDPA cell and HSUPA UE

* Cell NOT compatible with UE capabilities


HSxPA cell and R’99 UE
R’99 cell and HSxPA UE

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 29
* Cell fully compatible with UE capabilities
HSUPA cell and HSUPA UE
HSDPA or HSUPA cell and HSDPA UE
R’99 cell and R’99 UE

* Cell partially compatible with UE capabilities


HSDPA cell and HSUPA UE

* Cell NOT compatible with UE capabilities


HSxPA cell and R’99 UE
R’99 cell and HSxPA UE

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 30
If GSM and FDD Twin cells are applicable then the RNC shall select the RAT based on parameter
is3GHandoverPreferred (true selects FDD; false selects GSM);
In iMCTA CAC and iMCTA Alarm and AO upsize CAC trigger conditions, if FDD is applicable and two or more
Twin cells are applicable then iMCTA selects the target FDD cell based on the following criteria:
If UE is HSUPA capable, preference is given to HSUPA cells then HSDPA cells or if UE is HSDPA capable,
preference is given to HSDPA cells.
Preference is given to the least loaded cell (Call type load or DCH load).
Preference is given to cell (s) belonging to the Carrier with the highest priority.
Round Robin based on downlink frequency (ARFCN).
In iMCTA Service and AO upsize Service trigger conditions, if FDD is applicable and two or more Twin cells
are applicable then iMCTA selects the target FDD cell based on the following criteria:
Cells belonging to the Carriers with the highest priority are kept.
Preference is given to the least loaded cell (Call type load or DCH load).
Round Robin based on downlink frequency (ARFCN).
If GSM is applicable and two or more Twin cells are applicable then iMCTA selects target GSM cell based the
following criteria:
Preference is given to the least loaded cell.
Round Robin based on downlink frequency (ARFCN).
Decision for Blind HO
Previous steps allow filtering an applicable cell for Blind HO. In such a case, the RNC triggers either 3G2G HHO
or Intra-RNC HHO.
If no twin cell is applicable, then iMCTA shall continue with measurement based HO if enabled and neighbors
cells are applicable.
If Blind HO fails, the following may apply:
The RNC triggers “iMCTA fallback” if provisioned (please refer to section 2.8.4.10).
Call returns to the initial frequency.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 31
If Blind HO does not apply or if no twin cell is eligible for Blind HO, then iMCTA shall continue with the
Measurement-based HO process if enabled. Once the Priority table has been retrieved for the selected Service
Type, this function aims at filtering the inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighborhood provisioning of the FDD cell
so as to eventually keep the cells:
Belonging to an authorized PLMN
Compatible with the retrieved Priority Table, i.e. neighboring cells whose Access is PNA are removed
Compatible with GSM and UMTS bands supported by UE
Compatible with Compressed Mode capabilities:
UE capabilities sent in an RRC Connection Setup Complete message
CM activation flags per DlUserService

isGsmCModeActivationAllowed indicates if the compressed mode for GSM is allowed for this DlUserService.
isInterFreqCModeActivationAllowed indicates if the compressed mode for inter-frequency is allowed for this
DlUserService.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 32
As per 3GPP, neither the relocation procedure nor the RNSAP RL addition procedure supports the Transport
Channel addition/deletion. Therefore, for iMCTA CAC, every neighboring cell belonging to another RNC are
removed.
For iMCTA Service, unlike iMCTA Alarm and iMCTA CAC, the neighboring cells whose priority is worse than the
Primary cell one are removed.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 33
Feature principles
The ALU RNC will compute the Inter-Freq neighbor list if:
A new RRC Measurement Control message needs to be sent to the UE for inter-frequency measurements.
the primary cell changes or the active set is updated while an inter-frequency measurement is ongoing.

The ALU RNC will compute the Inter-RAT neighbour list if a new RRC Measurement Control message needs to
be sent to the UE for inter-RAT measurements.
The Compounding Neighbor List algorithm considers:
Occurrence of a cell within all neighborhoods.
Measured quality of the sponsoring active set cell.
Priority defined per neighboring cell.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 34
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 35
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 36
Rational:
3GPP 25.133 restricts the maximum number of carriers to be supported simultaneously by the UE to the current
carrier plus up to 2 additional FDD carriers, i.e. a total of 3 carriers. The UE behavior is undefined if more than 2
additional FDD carriers are to be measured. Tests with one UE type showed that arbitrarily some carriers were
ignored (not necessarily the carriers given first/last). QUALCOMM stated that the first two frequencies are
selected. For a deterministic behavior the RNC is required to restrict the number of additional (i.e. inter-
frequency) FDD carriers to be measured by a UE to 2.

Enhancement of two IFREQ carriers


To avoid impacting the neighboring relations management, a dynamic approach to determine the two neighbor
carriers for an UE is implemented – please note that the interest of such an algorithm is for sites with 4 or more
carriers.
If “Measurement based HO” is decided and more than two candidate FDD carriers are still eligible to be target
layers, the RNC only choose 2 carriers for UE measurement. The following parameter is used:
carrierPreSelectAlgorithm. If carrierPreSelectAlgorithm = disabled, do not care of the number of frequencies
sent to the UE in measurement control.

Notes:
This feature is about inter-frequency (the UE can measure more than 2 cells in IFREQ).
This feature impacts the “Neighboring cell searching and filtering” part of the iMCTA algorithm.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 37
Once target Access has been selected, this function configures Inter-frequency or GSM measurements on Node
B and UE sides, by respectively sending the NBAP Compressed Mode Command and RRC Measurement
Control messages.
The alarm measurement results are reported in periodic mode.
In event mode, new measurements are configured to report Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT measurements (Intra-
Frequency measurement are not impacted and still reported in event-triggered mode).

The UE is requested to report up to 6 neighboring cells amongst the monitored set. The monitored set is defined
as the set of FDD inter-frequency and GSM neighbors of the primary cell and is provided to the UE through a
MEASUREMENT CONTROL message first time the alarm measurement condition is fulfilled and on modification
of the monitored set.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 38
This function processes the measurements reported by the UE so as to possibly perform HHO. Processing is
different for Inter-frequency or GSM measurements. To improve the measurement report processing in UA08.1, a
measurement report processing delay is implemented.

In order to minimize algorithm changes, the same behavior is adopted between periodic and full event modes.
The alarm measurement results are reported in periodic mode.
The only difference is that:
In periodic mode, Inter-Freq/Inter-RAT are declared as additional measurements reported in the same RRC
measurement reports as Intra-Frequency (rrcIntraFreqMeasurementReportingPeriod).
In event mode, new measurements are configured to report Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT measurements (Intra-
Frequency measurements are not impacted and are still reported in event-triggered mode).
In event mode and if both Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT measurements are used, then the Inter-Frequency
measurement is configured as the main measurement in periodic mode and the Inter-RAT measurement is
configured as the additional measurement of the Inter-Frequency measurement.
The UE is requested to report up to 6 neighboring cells amongst the monitored set. The monitored set is defined
as the set of FDD inter-frequency and GSM neighbors of the primary cell and is provided to the UE through a
MEASUREMENT CONTROL message first time the alarm measurement condition is fulfilled and on modification
of the monitored set.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 39
Rational: the RNC uses a single 2D threshold for both IFREQ & I-RAT measurements and it asks the UE to start
measuring both IFREQ & I-RAT neighbor cells at the same time. Also, the RNC uses periodic IFREQ & I-RAT
measurements with a periodicity of 0.5 s, meaning UE sends a measurement report every 0.5 seconds. Field
observations show that UE reports first cells from the first frequency ranked on Measurement Command and
takes about 2-3 s for completing the measurement on all the cells in the neighboring list. The measurement
reports sent in the mean time contain only partial measurements that may even not include cells from the
preferred priority layer.
Report Processing Delay Enhancement: to improve the measurement report processing it is implemented a
measurement report processing delay; this implementation is enabled if Imcta/measRepDiscardTimerXXX > 0
and only apply if:
Simultaneous I-FREQ and I-RAT measurements are needed, or
the IFREQ measurement list contains cells belonging to multiple carrier frequencies.
In such conditions, measurement reports are processed the following way:
on expiry of timer Imcta/measRepDiscardTimerXXX, or
if target cell technology is preferred (parameter is3GHandoverPreferred) AND target cell Call Type color is
GREEN.
If CM is needed (mono-receiver UE) then CM activation time is additionally taken into account.
The timer measRepDiscardTimer is adjusted for the CM activation time (it starts on start of iMCTA guard timer
and is stopped whenever iMCTA guard timer is stopped). measRepDiscardTimer is adjusted the following way:
UE needs CM for FDD: (CModeConfiguration::cModeDeltaCfn + CModePatternSeqInfo::tgcfnOffset of FDD)
* 10
UE needs CM for GSM: (CModeConfiguration::cModeDeltaCfn + CModePatternSeqInfo::tgcfnOffset of GSM
BSIC) * 10
Note: This feature impacts the « Measurement report processing » part of the iMCTA algorithm.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 40
If the simultaneous compressed mode is requested but not possible then the RNC uses the single compressed
mode as per parameter is3GHandoverPreferred.
So, it specifies whether to perform inter-Frequency (3G) or inter-RAT (2G) measurements if the RAB combination
or the Node B does not support simultaneous CM patterns.

is3GHandoverPreferred = TRUE will also result in choosing an FDD cell as target if the measurement report
contains eligible cells from both 2G and FDD. Consequently, more traffic will handover to other FDD layer(s).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 41
FDD Eligible Cells filtering is explained later in the document.
Filtering on HSxPA capabilities for iMCTA Alarm or CAC is explained later in the document.
Load Post-Filtering is available from UA07 onwards; it is explained later in the document.

Best Cell Color Cells


FDD Cell Load must be understood here as Worst Combined DL and UL Cell Colors:
All reported neighboring cells whose load is the lowest, among all cells remaining in the list after Filtering on
HSxPA capabilities, must be kept; all the others are removed.
This is applicable whatever Priority of the neighboring cell.
For instance, if some reported cells have their Cell Color= GREEN and others = YELLOW, then only the
cells of GREEN Cell Color are kept, YELLOW ones are removed.
Note: an FDD cell belonging to a neighboring RNC is considered as RED as Serving RNC is not able to
determine its load color.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 42
To be eligible to HHO, a FDD neighboring cell must be reported better than 2 thresholds, one for CPICH Ec/No,
another for CPICH RSCP.
In UA07, the RNC filters target cells for which:
CPICH EcNo < minimumCpichEcNoValueForHO
CPICH RSCP < minimumCpichRscpValueForHO

In UA08, as the minimumCpichEcNoValueForHO/minimumCpichRscpValueForHO parameters are defined


per service, an enhancement is done in order to add an offset which depends on the neighbor cell. This
enhancement allows more flexibility and better tuning of the target cell. With such an implementation, different
target FDD carriers may have different eligibility thresholds for HHO.

The RNC then filters target cells for which:


CPICH EcNo < minimumCpichEcNoValueForHO + UMTSFddNeighbouringCell/
minimumCpichEcNoValueForHoOffset
Or CPICH RSCP < minimumCpichRscpValueForHO + UMTSFddNeighbouringCell/
minimumCpichRscpValueForHoOffset.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 43
This filtering for iMCTA Alarm and CAC load based is only invoked if isImctaLoadBasedAllowed = TRUE.
In this case, to be eligible to HHO, an FDD neighboring cell shall have a Cell Load Color fulfilling the
imctaLoadBasedTargetCellColorThreshold.

For instance, if imctaLoadBasedTargetCellColorThreshold = Yellow and one DCH color of the neighboring cell
is Red, this cell is removed from the candidate list to HHO.

An additional criterion applies for iMCTA Alarm and CAC load based: the 2G layer should be set with the same
priority value (different from PNA) as the highest FDD priority (activation of simultaneous IFREQ/ I-RAT
measurements) is mandatory allowing simultaneous FDD and GSM compressed modes. This way, it is
guaranteed that at least an inter-RAT handover is performed to rescue the call due to coverage loss or resource
shortage when all FDD neighboring cells are discarded due to overload.

In UA07.1, isImctaLoadBasedAllowed enables the cell load criteria when the reason for iMCTA is Alarm or
CAC failure.

Table 13. 26: iMCTA CAC Summary

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 44
Filtering on UE and reported cells HSxPA capabilities aims at optimizing UTRAN radio resources since only
HSxPA capable mobiles are able to use HSxPA radio resources.
Don’t forget that for iMCTA Alarm or iMCTA CAC, Priority is the same between the different FDD carriers.
As an example, if UE is HSUPA capable, the RNC will keep the HSUPA-capable cells if present. Otherwise, the
HSDPA-capable cells if present. Otherwise, all cells.
This filtering can be seen as a “best-effort” filtering.
HSxPA UE stands for HSUPA or HSDPA UE, i.e. R6 or R5 UE.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 45
GSM Eligible Cells filtering is explained later in the document.
GSM Cell Load must be understood here as a means to inhibit an HHO to a GSM cell to which a previously
attempted HHO has failed in the last inhibitTimer3g2g seconds.
A GSM target cell will have a RED Cell Color if a handover towards this cell has been rejected for load
reasons in the previous inhibitTimer3g2g seconds.
Otherwise the Cell Color is GREEN.
The 2G cell load detection is based on the receipt of the RANAP Relocation Preparation Failure message
with a cause IE value equal to “Relocation failure in target CN/RNC or target system”.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 46
To be eligible to HHO, a GSM neighboring cell (BCCH RxLev) must be reported better than a threshold.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 47
The aim of this feature is to make better 2G Target cell selection during an inter-system handover procedure,
thanks to a better knowledge of the 2G cell load, which is provided by the 2G BSC.

Moreover, the RNC takes the opportunity to provide the 2G BSC, during an inter-system handover procedure,
with the 3G cell load information so as to also allow it to improve the 3G Target cell selection. The 3G cell load
information is sent in the following RANAP messages:
Relocation required / old BSS to new BSS information
Relocation request ACK / new BSS to old BSS information
Relocation failure / new BSS to old BSS information
During inter-system handover procedures, the feature must ensure the following functions when the feature is
activated:
Compute the UTRAN cell load information and send it to the BSC.
When the GSM cell load information is provided by the BSC, compute the GSM cell load color based on this
received cell load information.

If the 2G network supports the feature Unified RRM Step 2, the GSM cell load information is received by the
RNC in the following messages:
Relocation request / source RNC to target RNC
Relocation command / inter system information transparent container
Relocation preparation failure / inter system information transparent container

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 48
FDD Eligible Cells filtering is the same as for iMCTA Alarm or CAC.
Filtering on HSxPA capabilities for iMCTA Service is explained later in the document.
Filtering on load criteria is explained later in the document.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 49
Unlike iMCTA Alarm and iMCTA CAC, a new filtering is introduced based on the hsxpaSegmentationEnable
parameter.
When this parameter is set to True, the algorithm removes all reported cells that are not compatible with UE’s
HSxPA capabilities (sent in the RRC Connection Setup Complete message):
If UE is NOT HSxPA-capable, all HSxPA-capable cells are removed (either HSDPA or HSUPA).
If UE is HSxPA-capable (either HSDPA or HSUPA), all non HSxPA-capable cells are removed.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 50
The idea of iMCTA Service is to improve quality of service or to optimize resource usage.
Therefore, all reported neighboring cells whose load is worse than targetCellColourThreshold must be
removed. This is applicable whatever Priority of the neighboring cell.
For instance, if targetCellColourThreshold= YELLOW and one DCH color of the neighboring cell is RED, this
cell is removed from the candidate list to HHO.
Note: an FDD cell belonging to a neighboring RNC is considered as RED as Serving RNC is not able to
determine its load color.
Comparing reported neighboring cell’s iMCTA color with targetCellColourThreshold is systematically performed
by iMCTA Service, for load balancing purposes but also for traffic segmentation (which is based on UE and
NodeB HSxPA capabilities).
If the operator’s top priority is to perform traffic segmentation rather than load balancing,
targetCellColourThreshold must be set to RED so as to systematically go further in the algorithm,
whatever neighboring cell load.
If isServiceSegmentationTopPriority=True AND originating cell is NOT fully compatible with UE capabilities,
remove cells that are NOT compatible with UE capabilities:
Fully and partially compatible cells are kept
Flag defined per serviceType
If priority is equal to primary cell:
If cell load is GREEN or better than Primary cell load, keep the cell
Otherwise remove the cell except when isServiceSegmentationTopPriority=True AND originating cell
is NOT fully compatible with UE capabilities
Don’t forget that for that neighboring cells whose priority is worse than the Primary cell one have been
removed at “Neighbouring Cell Searching and Filtering” stage.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 51
GSM Eligible Cells filtering is the same as for iMCTA Alarm or CAC.
GSM Cell Load must be understood here as a means to inhibit an HHO to a GSM cell to which a previously
attempted HHO has failed in the last inhibitTimer3g2g seconds:
A GSM target cell will have a RED Cell Color if a handover towards this cell has been rejected for load
reasons in the previous inhibitTimer3g2g seconds.
otherwise the Cell Color is GREEN.
The 2G cell load detection is based on receipt of the RANAP Relocation Preparation Failure message with a
cause IE value equal to “Relocation failure in target CN/RNC or target system”.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 52
HHO Decision is taken by the RNC according to the Measurement Reported on neighboring cells: HHO triggered
can be Inter-RAT normal or blind, Inter-Freq Intra-RNC or Inter-RNC.
The period during which iMCTA Alarm waits for neighboring reported cells is bounded by 2 different guard timers,
so-called measurementGuardTimerFdd and measurementGuardTimer2g, depending on the selected target
Access type.
At guard timer expiration, if no neighboring cell is candidate for HHO (no reported cell has been reported or
the reported cells have been discarded):
For iMCTA Alarm:
RNC triggers 2G Blind HO if provisioned.
otherwise Compressed Mode is reactivated if Event 2F has not been received (iMTCA Alarm
only).
For iMCTA CAC
RAB cannot be established and the RNC sends RANAP RAB Assignment Response (RAB
failed list) to CN.
For iMCTA Service
The UE remains on the initial frequency.
measurementGuardTimerFdd and measurementGuardTimer2g replace UA04.2 previous CM timers
(gsmCmodeReactivationTimer, fddCmodeReactivationTimer) and HHO timers (blindHhoGsmTimer,
blindHhoFddTimer).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 53
If iMCTA Alarm or iMCTA CAC HHO to another FDD frequency or to GSM fails due to any reason (internal
SRNC failure, NBAP, RNSAP, RANAP or RRC failure message) and iMCTA Alarm or CAC fallback is enabled via
parameter Imcta/imctaFallbackHoFailure then the RNC will once re-attempt HHO to another target cell.
The fallback is triggered only once. If the fallback attempt also fails, then no 3rd attempt is done.
The target for a fallback is selected as follows:
“Measurement based HO”: The 2nd best cell if reported by the UE.
“Blind HO”: The next Twin cell if configured (2nd best target).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 54
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 55
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 56
RAN model showing the relations between the MOs.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 57
RAN model showing the parameters of the MOs.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 58
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 59
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 60
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 61
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 62
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 63
Mode: defines what triggers iMCTA (Alarm, Alarm & CAC, Alarm & Service, All)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 64
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 65
Thanks to the Compressed Mode (CM), a UE can perform an HHO to 2G with measurements.
CM for 2G neighboring cells measurements is activated when the UE has a CS RAB or a PS RAB on 3G if:
isInterFreqMeasActivationAllowed = True
isGsmCModeActivationAllowed = True
isPatternAllowed = True

Inter-system HHO can occur following iMCTA Alarm, CAC or Service triggering. The selection between FDD and
2G Access is part of the iMCTA algorithm, mostly based on UE capabilities, priority tables and available
neighboring cells.

3G to 2G HHO is possible for a UE:


having a CS service if activationHoGsmCsAllowed is set to True.
having a PS service if activationHoGsmPsAllowed is set to True.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 66
If the SRNC received a RELOCATION PREPARATION FAILURE message upon a RELOCATION REQUIRED
message for relocation preparation to a GSM target cell with one of the following causes:
No Radio Resources Available in Target cell (or)
Relocation Target Not Allowed (or)
Relocation Failure in Target CN/RNC or Target system
Then UTRAN can retry relocation preparation to the next best GSM cell if the UE has reported more than one cell
with sufficient received BCCH level.
This mechanism can be enabled via the isGsmIratHoToNextBestCellAllowed parameter introduced in UA07.
Else SRNC shall maintain the CS call on 3G with no further HHO attempt. A new 3G 2G HHO attempt may be
triggered again at the next 2G measurement report message received from the UE.

SRNC shall only trigger another relocation preparation procedure to the next best GSM cell (with lowest cell load
preferably (if available) and highest RSSI), based on latest 2G measurement report, if and only if:
An alternative GSM target cell exists as per the latest 2G measurement report.
If the UE has sent a combined measurement report for inter-RAT and inter-frequency then the report
contains no suitable inter-frequency target cells.
If eligible neighbors present in report for both inter-RAT and inter-frequency then HHO target layer selection
will be based on is3GHandoverPreferred.
The need for handover is still present, e.g. the alarm condition is still active.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 67
Global 3G->3G Inter-frequency HHOs are controlled by the is3Gto3GWithoutIurAllowedForCS and
is3Gto3GWithoutIurAllowedForPS parameters even though naming is not explicit.
isIrmCacForInterFreqIntraRncEnable allows to play iRM CAC tables on the Target FDD cell before executing
HHO (only applicable for Intra-RNC HHO).

If the Inter-Freq Intra-RNC HHO takes place in a DRNC then the procedure is:
either a handover over Iur with the neighboring RNC to be the DRNC which controls both the source and the
target cells.
or a SRNS relocation UE Involved with this DRNC to become the new SRNC.

It depends on the isInterFreqHandoverOverIurAllowed flag as follows:


f the isInterFreqHandoverOverIurAllowed flag is set to TRUE for the DRNC to control both source and
target cells then inter-frequency handover over Iur is used.
If the isInterFreqHandoverOverIurAllowed flag is set to FALSE for the DRNC to control both source and
target cells then the handover is performed through SRNS relocation UE Involved.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 68
Prior to UA07, Inter-RNC HHOs are processed in the same way whether there is Iur or not, i.e. through a SRNS
Relocation UE involved procedure through the CN.
From UA07, Inter-RNC HHOs are processed using the SRNS Relocation UE involved if the
isInterFreqHandoverOverIurAllowed parameter is set to False.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 69
The radio link to the target cell is to be set up with the RNSAP Radio Link Setup or RNSAP Radio Link
Addition procedure depending on the DRNC being new or already existing in the call context. The radio link to
the source cell needs to be released with the NBAP Radio Link Deletion procedure.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 70
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 71
This feature provides the following enhancements regarding LTE mobility:
Support of 3GPP Rel-8 RANAP interface for LTE to UMTS PS handover and PS Handover based CS
Fallback.
Inter-working with 3GPP Rel-8 Core Network.
Handling 3GPP Rel-8 CS Fallback IE, allowing success rate monitoring of PS Handover based CS Fallback
procedure.
Support of partial relocation in case of LTE to UMTS PS Handover procedure by accepting only a subset of
RABs supported on the UMTS layer in the RANAP relocation request procedure (maximum 3 PS RABs).
Partial relocation isn’t limited to the case where there are more than 3 PS RABs to handover from LTE to
UMTS. It is also applicable to 3 or less RABs.
For UMTS to LTE cell reselection procedure, SIB19 with extended E-UTRAN frequency to 8 frequencies is
broadcasted.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 72
Feature 104489 LTE to UMTS HHO provides Handover from LTE to UMTS and support the following procedures:
LTE to UMTS PS HHO: incoming SRNS relocation request triggered for a UE connected in 4G radio
network; Inter-RAT Mobility events used to trigger mobility 4G to 3G:
Event A2: Serving becomes worse than threshold.
Event B2: Serving becomes worse than threshold 1 and inter-RAT neighbor becomes better
than threshold 2.
CS Fallback from LTE to UMTS: The CS fallback procedure only could be started following the successful
completion of PS service relocation.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 73
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 74
UTRAN supports maximum 3 PDP contexts in UA08 and E-UTRAN supports till 8 RABs for a given UE.

The Ranap Relocation Request from LTE through the target SGSN may contain more than 3 RABs to be set up.
Some RAB combinations/services may not be supported by the RNC. As a result, UA08.1 introduces the
capability for the RNC to perform RAB selection to filter out some RABs before performing RAB matching.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 75
Incoming relocation request for 4G3G:
“RAB to setup list”

No
partialRelocationFr Existing RAB matching
omLTE == true? algorithm.
Yes
s
Filter out RABs with GBR > MAX_ACCEPTSANCE_GBR

st
Keep the 1 conv. RAB. Move
other conv. RABs and all
Yes PS conv. RAB Yes streaming RABs to “failed
conversational s supported? s RAB list”
RABs included?

No No

Move all conversational


RABs to “failed RAB list”

Yes
st
#streaming s Keep the 1 streaming RAB.
RABs > 1? Move other streaming RABs to
“failed RAB list”

No

Select 1st (up to) 3 RABs from remaining RAB to setup list. Add the rest RABs to the “failed RAB list”.

No
#RABs >0?
Peg counter NT_Iu_relocation_request_failures_ps
(537) screening
4Gto3GRejectionDueToRabMatchingFailure (12)
Move the last
RAB to “failed
RAB list”.
RAB Matching algorithm Relocation preparation fails.
Send RANAP relocation
failure.

No Yes
RAB Matching
succeessful?
s
No
Continue RAB setup for the
(#RABs ==2 && they are successful RABs.
Sig+Conv)? or Peg counter PS_Rab_Selection
(#RABs ==1 && it is
Conv.)?

Yes RAB setup No


s succeessful?
Move the remaining RAB(s) to “failed
Yes
RAB list”. Select the 1 st I/B RAB from
the RAB list right before the 1
st
RAB s
matching add RABs in “failed RAB list” to the
“RABs Failed To Setup List” of the
RANAP relocation request ack.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 76
CS fallback procedure
The CS fallback procedure could only be started following the successful completion of PS service relocation as
detailed in previous sections.
Regardless the Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) type (e.g. Mobile termination CS fallback or Mobile origination
CS fallback), the CSFB procedure is always beginning with an RRC UL INITIAL DIRECT TRANSFER message
of the "CN domain identity IE" set to "CS domain“, with the embedded NAS message of IDT set to either “Paging
Response” or “Service Request”.
The CS service is then setup in UTRAN with PS service already established.
UA08.1 PM108661 introduces a new RNC timer (TmaxDelayForCsCallEstablishment). The timer starts only for
handover with cause set to “CS fallback triggered”, after the Relocation Complete message is sent to the SGSN.
The purpose of this timer is to check whether a CS call is successfully established or not after an LTE to UMTS
relocation request with cause “CS fallback”.
If a CS establishment request (Initial Direct Transfer - Service Request, or Paging Response, with CS domain) is
for an established PS call with a CS fallback, timer TmaxDelayForCsCallEstablishment will be running.

When the Initial Direct Transfer message is received by the RNC, this CS establishment is identified and treated
as LTE to UMTS Handover with CS fallback:
Timer TmaxDelayForCsCallEstablishment is stopped.
CS establishment is treated as normal CS call setup.
Otherwise, this CS establishment is treated as normal CS call setup.
For LTE to UTRAN handover for CS fallback, handling the subsequent CS establishment after the PS handover
completes the whole CS fallback procedure.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 77
New UA08.1 parameters:
isPartialRelocationFromLteAllowed {boolean TRUE, FALSE} allows accepting only a part of RABs in the
RAB list contained in the RANAP relocation request from LTE.
maxDelayForCsCallEstablishment {Integer [1..300], unit second} is the maximum delay time for a CS
call setup request to be received, after a relocation from 4G is received with cause set to “CS fallback
triggered”.
Call Traces: a new CNode snapshot sub-function is added: the Snapshot CNode – Incoming relocation.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 78
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.10 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 10 · Page 79
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, error corrections,


layout improvements, and update to LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 2
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 3
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 4
Page

1 iMCRA overview 7
1.1 Objectives of iMCRA 8
1.2 iMCRA-step 1 (UA07) 10
1.3 iMCRA-step 2 (UA08) 11
1.4 Twin cells definition 12
2 iMCRA step 1 13
2.1 Redirection types 14
2.2 UE capabilities and call type 15
2.3 Cell capabilities and FaType 16
2.4 Candidate target cell list selection procedure 17
2.5 Load balancing procedure 19
2.6 RRC redirection based on CAC 20
2.7 iMCRA: RAN model 21
2.8 Exercise 1 22
2.9 Exercise 2 23
3 iMCRA step 2 24
3.1 Principle 25
3.2 Call type calculation 26
3.3 Action list mapping 28
3.4 Carrier selection list processing 29
3.5 Load condition calculation 30
3.6 Target carrier selection 31
3.7 CAC failure case 34
3.8 RAN model - MOs and their parameters 35
3.9 Exercise 38

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 5
This page is left blank intentionally

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 6
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 7
To increase the network capacity and optimize HSxPA throughput, operators may deploy multi-layer
configurations with several layers structures:
Multi-layers based on asymmetric topologies (dedicated layers for HSxPA or Data traffic separated from
dedicated layers for R’99 or Conversational traffic).
Multi-layers based on symmetric topologies (shared layers for HSxPA and R’99 traffic).
Several features are used in order to distribute the traffic between the different layers including 2G (GSM, CDMA)
and 4G (LTE):
Idle Mode & Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) allows strategies based on UEs camping homogeneously
on different frequencies or favor specific carriers or even prioritizing cell layers for mobiles in idle mode,
Cell_FACH and URA/Cell_PCH connected modes. The HCS cell reselection algorithm also takes into
account UE speed so that fast moving UEs can be placed in large cells to avoid excessive cell reselections.
Intelligent Multi-Carrier RRC Connection Allocation: iMCRA allows redirecting UE to FDD, GSM or LTE
cells at RRC connection establishment. iMCRA Step 2 provides a powerful programmable RRC redirection
action matrix giving great flexibility to operators for a best use of their access carrier’s resources. It provides
the capability to process in parallel the RRC Connection Request message or the failure of SRB CAC based
on:
iMCRA Service may be triggered by the RRC Connection Request message, enabling RRC
redirection to an FDD cell or the GSM RAT or the LTE RAT based on common or mixed RRC
Redirection strategies.
iMCRA CAC may be triggered by the failure of SRB CAC induced by any CAC failure cause, enabling
RRC redirection to an FDD cell or the GSM RAT or the LTE RAT based on common or mixed RRC
Redirection strategies.
Intelligent Multi-Carrier Traffic Allocation (iMCTA) allowing handover UE to another layer when in
Cell_DCH connected mode.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 8
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 9
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 10
When activated, iMCRA step 2 replaces the following features (meaning the user can define an action list and a
carrier selection list to reproduce the function of those features):
iMCRA Step 1
3G/2G Redirection based on cell load (partially)
3G/2G Redirection for speech call
Load Balancing between HSPA carriers (partially, iMCRA part)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 11
The twin cells are co-located inter-frequency cells plus cells from other Node B for blind redirection referenced by
Cell Id.

Cells FDD 2, FDD 3, FDD 4 and FDD 5 are twin cells of cell FDD 1.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 12
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 13
During the RRC Connection Setup procedure, the RNC determines the preferred Frequency Allocation (FA)
based on:
UE capability only (Redirection based on UE HSPA capabilities already available in UA06 plus
segmenting R6+ UEs, plus choice of less loaded target cell).
UE capability and establishment cause (Redirection based on UE HSPA capabilities and call type
already available in UA06 plus segmenting R6+ UEs, plus choice of less loaded target cell).
Preferred FA (Select original cell or twin cell with lowest cell load).
Note: FA – Frequency Allocation = Carrier
Optional FA classification: “Conversational”, “Data” or “Other” layer
Originating CellColorThresholdset to either GREEN/YELLOW/RED
GREEN: Full Load distribution; high number of redirections
RED: Load distribution only when originating cell gets overloaded
CAC (Redirection to twin cells with lowest load if CAC failure on originating cell)
None (Redirection disabled)

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 14
The UE capability combinations are based on the Access Stratum Release Indication IE in the RRC Connection
Request message for the identification of the different UE types.
The call type identification is based on the Establishment Cause IE in the RRC Connection Request message to
distinguish the different call types.
Note:
From UA07, the following causes “Originating Subscribed Traffic Call”, “Registration” and “Originating High
Priority Signaling” are mapped to the Data type but they may be removed from the list of Data causes that could
perform a redirection. Indeed, for short and low traffic procedures some operators may prefer to keep the UE on
the originating cell that had been selected by the UE for access.
From UA07, the spare RadioAccessService. reserved2 byte 2 (3rd byte) is used to handle the configuration
referred above. For future releases, Boolean; {True, False} parameter
RadioAccessService. isOrigHighPrioSigAndRegistPreferredDataCall will apply.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 15
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 16
Please note that an optional criterion introduced by UA06 feature 84900 is based on the preferred layer to
distinguish the R’99 services potentially served on the preferred layer from the others. It is only applicable for
configurations using rrcRedirectionType = ‘capaOnly’ or ‘capaAndEstCause’.
In such conditions, for all cells with layerPreferredForR99 = TRUE, the RNC shall assume HSPA Cell Capability
= DCH. For all cells with layerPreferredForR99 = FALSE, the RNC shall assume HSPA Cell Capability = HSPA.
When to decide if an RRC connection should be redirected to the DCH (R’99) layer, the function check
layerPreferredForR99 for both cells, in addition to the existing criteria. Only when both twin cells are
configured as HSPA capable, layerPreferredForR99 is checked. If the current cell does not prefer R’99 but
the twin cell does, redirect is selected. Otherwise, the current behavior is unchanged.
When to decide if an RRC connection should be redirected to HSPA layer, the function check
layerPreferredForR99 for both cells, in addition to the existing criteria’s. Only when both twin cells are
configured as HSPA capable, layerPreferredForR99 is checked. If the current cell prefers R’99 but the twin
cell does not, redirect is selected. Otherwise, the current behavior is unchanged.
This option applies in case HSxPA is deployed on both layers (allowing both layers to carry HSPA traffic and
keeping RRC Traffic Segmentation enabled for R5+ UEs). It is possible to prefer some of the HSPA capable
layers for R’99 traffic by using parameter layerPreferredForR99 (it is possible to configure several cells with
layerPreferredForR99=TRUE and to configure R’99-only cells, layerPreferredForR99 cells and HSPA cells):
DCH service originated on non-preferred cell will be redirected to the preferred cell.
HSxPA service originated on preferred cell will be redirected to the non-preferred cell.
This algorithm is enhanced from UA06.0, i.e. the RNC is able to find preferred HSxPA cells for DCH traffic in
case using RRC Traffic Segmentation based on UE Capabilities. This enhancement is only applicable if the
originating cell and operational twin cell is enabled for HSDPA (parameter hsdpaActivation).
Emergency calls are redirected in case of CAC failure only.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 17
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 18
Load Balancing is applied for any rrcRedirectionType (capaOnly, capaAndEstCause, preferredFA and cAC)
after the Candidate Target Cell List Selection procedure. This procedure will find the best target cell among the
candidate target cell list provided by the Candidate Target Cell List Selection phase.
If the originating cell is included in the set of candidate cells and the originating cell color is better than
rrcRedirectOrigCellColourThreshold then the call is established in the originating cell (note: not applicable for
rrcRedirectionType =cAC).
Otherwise, if two or more cells are selected, the following steps (with decreasing priority) are processed until
retaining one cell:
Preference is given to the less loaded cells.
The originating cell is selected if it is included in the list. Otherwise, select the twin cell with the round robin
algorithm based on frequency number (dlFrequencyNumber > originating one).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 19
RRC Redirection can trigger re-try of the RRC Connection Allocation procedure when CAC failure occurs.
If CAC occurred during SRB establishment on the originating cell then the RNC considers redirection to a list of
twin cells. Emergency calls are also redirected in case of CAC failure.

iMCRA Interaction with 3G to 2G Redirect for Speech Calls:


If iMCRA is activated with rrcRedirectionType= cac (cares for redirection to another frequency only. Not for
redirection to GSM), if CAC occurred during SRB establishment on the originating cell then the RNC considers
redirection to another FDD cell; this is applicable to all establishment causes.
If both iMCRA & 3G/2G Redirect for Speech calls are activated, Originating Conversational call or Emergency call
is redirected by feature 3G/2G Redirect for Speech calls (CAC) to GSM only when the redirection triggered by
iMCRA fails CAC again on target cell selected.
If rrcRedirectionType= cAC is not configured and 3G/2G Redirect for Speech calls is activated, the RNC
decides to redirect to 2G Conversational or Emergency calls upon SRB CAC failure on originating cell.

iMCRA Interaction with 3G to 2G Redirection based on cell load:


If both iMCRA and 3G to 2G Redirection based on cell load are activated, for Originating Conversational call or
Emergency call, when target twin cell(s) are selected by iMCRA RRC Redirection and all the twin cell loads reach
the configurable threshold for 3G/2G redirection, the UE can be redirected to 2G using the RRC Connection
Reject message by 3G to 2G Redirection based on cell load.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 20
In UA08.1, the “TwinCellList” parameter moves from the InterFreqHhoFddCell object to the FDDCell
object.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 21
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 22
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 23
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 24
iMCRA CALL TYPE CALCULATION
This function calculates the iMCRA call type associated to the RRC establishment cause received in the RRC
Connection request message. It can be distinguished between iMCRA basic call types and iMCRA group call
types.
The iMCRA group call types cover a set of iMCRA basic call types.
iMCRA CARRIER SELECTION PROCESS
iMCRA has two logical sub-functions: iMCRA Service and iMCRA CAC.
iMCRA Service covers triggers of RRC Connection Request message reception.
iMCRA CAC covers failure of SRB CAC induced by any CAC failure cause.
The operator can assign one iMCRA Action List for iMCRA Service and one iMCRA Action List for iMCRA CAC
per FDD cell.
ACTION LIST MAPPING
This function provides a pointer to the iMCRA Carrier Selection List based on the iMCRA call type matching;
i.e. Call Type = HspaGroupCall can point to “HSPA carrier selection list”
i.e. Call Type = DchGroupCall can point to “DCH selection list”
CARRIER SELECTION LIST PROCESSING
The Carrier Selection List consists of load conditions and target carrier process.
It permits user to configure criteria for target carrier selection.
The target carrier can contain an FDD cell or GSM or LTE RAT or it can be empty.
LOAD CONDITION CALCULATION
This function will verify the Load Condition to apply for the associated target carrier list.
TARGET CARRIER LIST PROCESS
This function will select a suitable target carrier for redirection among the list of target carriers fulfilling the load
condition.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 25
iMCRA Basic Call type and iMCRA Group Call type calculation can be split to several steps:
Step 1 RRC message derives “RRC cause Types”
Step 2 RRC cause types mapped to Basic call types
Step 3 Basic call types simplify to Group call Types

Group Call Types are listed as follows:


MO CS Group Call: Mobile originated CS voice call over DCH or HSPA and mobile originated CS
conversational calls, if established by a UE < Rel-6.
CS Group Call: Mobile originated or terminated CS voice or data call over DCH or HSPA and Mobile
originated or terminated Conversational Calls if established by a UE < Rel-6.
DCH Group Call: CS or PS call over DCH.
HSPA Group Call: CS or PS call over HSPA.
PS Data Group Call: PS call over DCH or HSPA.
CS/PS Group Call: CS or PS call over DCH or HSPA.
All Group Call: CS or PS call over DCH or HSPA or signaling only connections.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 26
Basic Call Types are listed as follows:
MO CS Voice Call: Mobile originated CS voice call over DCH (UEs > = Rel-6) except UEs which are
VoHSPA capable
MT CS Voice Call: Mobile terminated CS voice call over DCH (UEs > = Rel-6) except UEs which are
VoHSPA capable
MO CS Conversational Call: Mobile originated CS voice or data call over DCH (UEs < Rel-6)
MT CS Conversational Call: Mobile terminated CS voice or data call over DCH (UEs < Rel-6)
CS Voice Call: Mobile originated or terminated CS voice call on DCH, if the use of RRC establishment cause
is disabled (UEs > = Rel-6)
CS Data Call: Mobile originated or terminated CS data call on DCH, if the use of RRC establishment cause
is disabled (UEs > = Rel-6)
PS DCH Call: PS data call over DCH
HSDPA Data Call: PS data call over HSDPA.
HSxPA Data Call: PS data call over HSPA
DC Data Call: PS data call over HSPA and dual cell option
LTE Data Call: PS data call over HSPA and LTE redirection option
Other Call: Signaling connections (e.g. location registrations). If the operator has disabled the use of the
RRC establishment cause by setting isRedirectionBasedOnEstablishmentCause to FALSE, then “Other
Call” includes all calls for UEs < Rel-5 and all calls for Rel-5 UEs in CS domain (for all Rel-5 UEs in the PS
domain “HSDPA Data Call” is assumed).

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 27
This function provides a pointer to the iMCRA Carrier Selection List based on the iMCRA call type matching. The
calculated iMCRA call type shall be matched with configured call type in the action list per action (basic call types
or group call types).
The first action in the list has the highest priority. Thus basic call types should be configured first before actions
for group call types. For the redirection of a certain percentage of calls according to the "Redirect Percentage"
field in the action list, the following formula applies: Redirect if (RedirectPercentage + (#call *
RedirectPercentage) % 1 >= 1); if the load condition is fulfilled and the call is selected according to the formula, a
selected target carrier is selected. Otherwise, the RNC will check the next load condition, if configured.
Maximum 50 Action Lists can be defined. Each Action List may contain maximum 15 actions.

Carrier Selection
Algorithm

N
Call Type
in Action List?

Select next Action


List entry Y
Carrier
Selection List
Processing
N
Output: Target Carrier
End of Y Target Carrier (FDD cell or RAT)
Action List? empty?

Y N
Update redirection
percentage figure

N Redirection
required according
to percentage
Target carrier = figure? Target carrier =
originating cell originating cell
Y

End

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 28
After matching the calculated iMCRA call type with one redirection action configured in the action list, RRC
Redirection Decision shall process its associated "Carrier Selection List”.
The Carrier Selection List contains a load Rule per instance plus an associated list of allowed target carriers
(target carrier list). The target carrier list includes FDD carriers or GSM or LTE RAT.
The following figure provides an example to the Carrier Selection List. The following conditions apply:
The first instance (#1) of the Carrier Selection List has the highest priority and is processed first (the
conditions stored in the instances (#1, #2…#y) of the Carrier Selection List are implicitly linked by an “OR”
operation = If the load condition does not match or no target carrier has been found, then the next instance
of the Carrier Selection List is processed).
A carrier selection rule can comprise up to four load conditions, which are linked by a logical AND operation,
i.e. if all of conditions of a rule are fulfilled, the carrier(s) in the target carrier list are applied.
Up to 150 Carrier Selection Lists can be defined per RNC (=three in mean per Action List). Each Carrier
Selection List can contain up to 20 rules with up to 4 conditions each.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 29
This function will verify the Load Condition to apply for the associated target carrier list. The load condition in the
Carrier Selection List comprises:
A frequency reference to an FDD frequency (F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10, F11, F12, Fo); carrier
is a reference to a frequency object defining the carrier (F1 – F12) or it references to the originating carrier
(Fo).
A load type (Single and Combined load type).
An operator (=, <=, <, >, >=, TRUE); If the "operator" field of the condition is set to TRUE, then the load
condition is always true.
A load value (Green < Yellow< Red < Black).
The RNC supports the following single load types as part of a load condition in the Carrier Selection List: DL
POWER Load; DL OVSF Load; DL IUB Load; DL CEM Load; UL CEM Load; UL RX POWER Load; HSDPA
Load;

The RNC supports the following combined load types as part of a load condition in the Carrier Selection List:
CEM Load = max (DL CEM and UL CEM loads); DL RADIO Load = max (DL POWER and DL OVSF loads); DL
DCH Load = max (DL RADIO, DL CEM and DL IUB loads); UL DCH Load = max (UL RX POWER and UL CEM
loads); DCH Load = max (DL DCH and UL DCH loads); HSDPA UL DCH Load = max (HSDPA Load and UL
DCH Load); HSPA Load = HSDPA load; TOTAL Load = max (DCH and HSPA loads); CALL TYPE Load - DCH
or HSDPA load.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 30
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 31
If the target carrier list contains two or more applicable FDD cells, the following sorting rules are applied:
1. Less loaded FDD cells shall be ranked highest.
2. Among FDD cells with equal load, the RNC shall rank the origination cell first if it is applicable.
3. Among FDD cells with equal load without originating cell, the RNC shall rank the FDD cells sorted by their
dlFrequencyNumber from low to high (round robin).

The load criterion to be used for load comparison depends on the call type, the UE´s HSDPA/HSUPA capability
and the FDD cell capability. The following load criteria are fixed coded:

Sort Criterion
Call Type belonging to st nd
1 2 3rd Comment
Calculated DCH
DCH group call type DCH Load
cell load value
FDD cell needs to
support HSDPA. If cell
HSPA group call type HSPA Load UL DCH Load does not support
HSDPA then use DCH
load.

The 2nd and 3rd criteria are only applied, if the previous selection criterion results in multiple cells with the same
load. The calculated DCH cell load value is derived from the individual cell loads and their weighted load color

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 32
In case of configured GSM target carrier, the RNC cannot check the GSM inter-RAT capability of the UE upon
RRC connection request. Nevertheless, the UE is redirected to GSM, which is performed by the UE via intra-
PLMN cell selection procedure. If the UE does not support the deployed GSM band, it will repeat the RRC
connection request.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 33
Each FDD cell refers to two action lists, one is used for iMCRA Service actions and the other is used for iMCRA
CAC actions.
Each action of an action list references to a Carrier Selection List.
Multiple FDD cells can point the same action list / Multiple actions can reference to the same Carrier Selection
List.

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 34
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 35
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 36
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 37
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 38
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 39
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.11 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 11 · Page 40
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.12 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 12 · Page 1
This page is left blank intentionally

Document History

Edition Date Author Remarks

3.0 2013-12-04 Kieslich, Roland Application of new template, and update to


LR13.W

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.12 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 12 · Page 2
# C-RNC Controlling-Radio Network Controller
16-QAM 16 – Quadrature Amplitude C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary
Modulation Identity
1xEV-DO 1x EVolution Data Only CS Circuit Switch
1xEV-DV 1x EVolution Data and Voice CTCH Common Traffic Channel
1xRTT 1 times 1.25MHz Radio Transmission
Technology D
3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel
3xEV-DV 3x Evolution Data and Voice DCH Dedicated CHannel
64KUDI 64 kbit/s Unrestricted Digital Information DL Downlink
DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control CHannel
A DPCH Dedicated Physical CHannel
AAL2 ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data CHannel
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 D-RNC Drift-Radio Network Controller
ACK ACKnowledgment DS Delay Sensitive
AICH Acquisition Indicator CHannel DS-CDMA Direct Sequence-Code Division
AM Acknowledged Mode Multiple Access
AMC Adaptive Modulation and Coding DSCH Downlink Shared CHannel
AMD Acknowledged Mode Data DTCH Dedicated Traffic CHannel
AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate DTX Discontinuous Transmission
AO Always-on
ARQ Automatic Repeat Query E
AS Access Stratum E1 Standard European PCM link
ASC Access Service Class (2.048 Mbps)
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode EDGE Enhanced Data for Global Evolution
EGPRS EDGE GPRS
B
BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel F
BCH Broadcast CHannel FACH Forward Access CHannel
BER Bit Error Rate FBI FeedBack Information
BFN NodeB Frame Number FBtS Fallback to Speech
BLER BLock Error Rate FDD Frequency Division Duplex
BMC Broadcast Multicast Control FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
BO Buffer Occupancy FIFO First In First Out
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying FP Frame Protocol
BTS Base Transceiver Station
G
C GMM Global Mobility Management
CAC Call Admission Control GPRS General Packet Radio Service
CC Chase Combining GSM Global System for Mobile
CCCH Common Control CHannel communications
CCP Communication Control Port GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol
CCPCH Common Control Physical CHannel
CCTrCH Coded Composite Transport CHannel H
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access H-ARQ Hybrid ARQ
CEM Channel Element Module HFN Hyper Frame Number
CFN Connection Frame Number HO HandOver
CID Channel IDentifier H-RNTI HS-DSCH Radio Network Temporary
CK Ciphering Key Identifier
CM Compressed Mode HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access
CmCH-PI Common transport CHannel Priority HS-DPCCH High Speed Dedicated Physical
Indicator (SPI) Control CHannel
CP NodeB Control Port HS-DSCH High Speed Downlink Shared CHannel
CP Control Plane
CPCH Common Packet CHannel
CPICH Common PIlot CHannel
CQI Channel Quality Indicator
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.12 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 12 · Page 3
HS-PDSCH High Speed Physical Downlink N
Shared CHannel NACK Negative ACKnowledgement
HS-SCCH High Speed Shared Control CHannel NAS Non-Access Stratum
NBAP Node B Application Part
I NDI New Data Indicator
IE Information Element NDS Non-Delay Sensitive
IK Integrity Key Nerr number of erroneous blocks
IMA Inverse Multiplexing ATM NI-SCUDIF Network Initiated Service Change
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Node B Logical node responsible for radio
Identity Tx/Rx to/from UE
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber NRZ Non-Return to Zero
Identity
IMT-2000 International Mobile O
Telecommunication for year 2000 OAM Operation Administration and
IP Internet Protocol Maintenance
IR Incremental Redundancy OVSF Orthogonal Variable Spreading
Iu Interconnection point between RNC Factor
and 3G Core Network
Iub Interface between Node B and RNC P
Iur Interface between two RNCs PA Power Amplifier
PBP Paging Block Periodicity
K PCCH Paging Control CHannel
Kbps Kilobit per second P-CCPCH Primary-Common Control Physical
kHz kilohertz CHannel
KPI Key Performance Indicator PCH Paging CHannel
Ksps Kilo symbol per second PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCPCH Physical Common Control CHannel
PDP Packet Data Protocol
L PDU Protocol Data Unit
L1 Layer 1 (Physical Layer) PI Paging Indicator
L2 Layer 2 (Data Link Layer) PI Priority Indicator
L3 Layer 3 (Network Layer) PICH Paging Indicator CHannel
LA Location Area PIR Partial Incremental Redundancy
LAC Location Area Code PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
LAI Location Area Identity PMM Packet Mobility Management
LAN Local Area Network PN Pseudo Noise
LSB Least Significant Bit PQ Priority Queue
PRACH Physical Random Access CHannel
M PS Packet Switch
MAC Medium Access Control P-SCH Primary-Synchronization CHannel
Mbps Megabit per second PSK Phase Shift Keying
MCC Mobile Country Code
MCPA Multi Carrier Power Amplifier Q
Mcps Megachip per second QId Queue Identity
MHz Megahertz QoS Quality of Service
MIR Mix Incremental Redundancy QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
MM Mobility Management
MNC Mobile Network Code
MOC Managed Object Class
MOI Managed Object Instance
MOS Mean Opinion Score
MSB Most Significant Bit

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.12 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 12 · Page 4
R
R4 Release 4 T
R5 Release 5 TAF That's All Folks!
R6 Release 6 TB Transport Block
RA Routing Area TBS Transport Block Size
RAB Radio Access Bearer TCP Transmission Control Protocol
RAC Routing Area Code TDD Time Division Duplex
RACH Random Access CHannel TDM Time Division Multiplexing
RAN Radio Access Network TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
RANAP Radio Access Network Application TF Transport Format
Part TFC Transport Format Combination
RB Radio Bearer TFCI Transport Format Combination
RF Radio Frequency Indicator
RL Radio Link TFI Transport Format Indicator
RLC Radio Link Control TFO Tandem Free Operation
RM Rate Matching TFRC Transport Format and Resource
RNC Radio Network Controller Combination
RNS Radio network subsystem TFRI Transport Format and Resource
RNSAP Radio Network Subsystem Application Indicator
Part TFS Transport Format Set
RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identity TPC Transmit Power Control
RRC Radio Resource Control TrCH Transport CHannel
RRM Radio Resource Management TrFO Transcoder Free Operation
RTT Radio Transmission Technology TS Time Slot
RV Redundancy Version TTI Transmission Time Interval
RX Receiver / Reception TX Transmitter / Transmission

S U
SA Service Area UARFCN UMTS Absolute Radio Frequency
SAP Service Access Point Channel Number
SAW Stop And Wait UDP User Datagram Protocol
S-CCPCH Secondary-Common Control UE User Equipment
Physical CHannel UI-SCUDIF User Initiated Service Change
SCH Synchronization CHannel UM Unacknowledged Mode
SCR Sustainable Cell Rate UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication
SDU Service Data Unit System
SF Spreading Factor UP User Plane
SFN System Frame Number URA UTRAN Registration Area
SHO Soft HandOver U-RNTI UTRAN-Radio Network Temporary
SIM Subscriber Identity Module Identity
SIR Signal to Interference Ratio UTRAN Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
SM Session Management Network
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio Uu the radio interface between UTRAN
SPI Scheduling Priority Indicator (CmCH- and UE
PI)
SRLR Synchronous Radio Link V
Reconfiguration VCC Virtual Channel Connection
S-RNC Serving-Radio Network Controller VoIP Voice over IP
S-SCH Secondary-Synchronization CHannel
STTD Space Time Transmit Diversity W
W-CDMA Wideband-CDMA

Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.


TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.12 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 12 · Page 5
Copyright © 2013 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.
TMO18255_V1.0-SG-LR13.W-Ed1 Module 1.12 Edition 3.0
Section 1 · Module 12 · Page 6
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR
@@COURSENAME - Page 1
All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent
Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its
contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR


@@COURSENAME - Page 2

Вам также может понравиться